Operating Instructions: AC Motors DR..71 - 315, DRN63 - 315, DR2..63 - 80

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *24745332_0818*
Operating Instructions
AC Motors
DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80
Edition 08/2018 24745332/EN

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
Contents
Contents
1 General information.................................................................................................................. 6
1.1 About this documentation ............................................................................................... 6
1.2 Structure of the safety notes ........................................................................................... 6
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty ............................................................................ 8
1.4 Product names and trademarks...................................................................................... 8
1.5 Copyright notice .............................................................................................................. 8
1.6 Other applicable documentation ..................................................................................... 8
2 Safety notes .............................................................................................................................. 9

2.1 Preliminary information ................................................................................................... 9
2.2 Duties of the user............................................................................................................ 9
2.3 Target group ................................................................................................................. 10
2.4 Designated use ............................................................................................................. 10
2.5 Transportation/storage.................................................................................................. 11
2.6 Installation/assembly..................................................................................................... 12
2.7 Electrical connection ..................................................................................................... 13
2.8 Startup/operation .......................................................................................................... 14
3 Motor structure ....................................................................................................................... 15

3.1 Basic design of DRN63, DR2..63 motors...................................................................... 15
3.2 Basic design of DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors .......................... 16
3.3 Basic structure DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 motors ............................................. 17
3.4 Basic structure DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 motors ................................................ 18
3.5 Basic structure DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors ................................................ 19
3.6 Basic structure DR..315, DRN315 motors .................................................................... 20
3.7 Nameplate..................................................................................................................... 21
3.8 Type designation........................................................................................................... 24
3.9 Designs and options ..................................................................................................... 25
3.10 Functional safety........................................................................................................... 28
4 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................................... 29

4.1 Before you start............................................................................................................. 29
4.2 Preliminary work after longer periods of storage .......................................................... 30
4.3 Motor installation notes ................................................................................................. 33
4.4 Installation tolerances ................................................................................................... 35
4.5 Assembling the input elements ..................................................................................... 35
4.6 Encoder mounting adapter............................................................................................ 36
4.7 Terminal box ................................................................................................................. 40
4.8 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet ..................................... 43
4.9 Direct mounting of a motor on a gear unit..................................................................... 48
24745332/EN – 08/2018
4.10 Options.......................................................................................................................... 51
5 Electrical installation.............................................................................................................. 57

5.1 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams .................................................... 58
5.2 Wiring notes .................................................................................................................. 58
5.3 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter ............................................... 59
5.4 Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding................................................... 61
Operating Instructions – AC Motors 3

Contents
5.5 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding ............................................................ 62

5.6 Special aspects in switching operation ......................................................................... 66
5.7 Special aspects of torque motors and low-speed motors ............................................. 66
5.8 Special aspects of DRK.. single-phase motors............................................................. 67
5.9 Notes regarding the connection of the motor................................................................ 69
5.10 Connecting the motor via terminal block....................................................................... 70
5.11 Connecting the motor plug connector ........................................................................... 79
5.12 Connecting the motor via terminal strip ........................................................................ 85
5.13 Connecting the brake.................................................................................................... 87
5.14 Options.......................................................................................................................... 96
6 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 109

6.1 Before startup ............................................................................................................. 110
6.2 Motors with reinforced bearing.................................................................................... 110
6.3 Motors with backstop /RS ........................................................................................... 111
7 Inspection/maintenance....................................................................................................... 112
7.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals......................................................................... 114
7.2 Bearing lubrication ...................................................................................................... 115
7.3 Reinforced bearings.................................................................................................... 116
7.4 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work ...................................................... 117
7.5 Inspection/maintenance work for DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 motors ......
135
7.6 Inspection/maintenance work for DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80
brakemotors ................................................................................................................ 137
7.7 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB.................................................... 163
7.8 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE.................................................... 167
7.9 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop .......................................... 177
8 Technical data....................................................................................................................... 180

8.1 Braking torques........................................................................................................... 180
8.2 Braking work, working air gap, and brake lining carrier thickness .............................. 183
8.3 Operating currents ...................................................................................................... 184
8.4 Resistors ..................................................................................................................... 188
8.5 Brake control............................................................................................................... 192
8.6 Permitted rolling bearings ........................................................................................... 198
8.7 Lubricant tables........................................................................................................... 200
8.8 Encoders..................................................................................................................... 202
8.9 Diagnostic unit /DUE................................................................................................... 211
8.10 Characteristic safety values ........................................................................................ 212
8.11 S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor .................................................................... 213
24745332/EN – 08/2018
9 Malfunctions.......................................................................................................................... 214
9.1 Motor malfunctions...................................................................................................... 215
9.2 Brake malfunctions ..................................................................................................... 217
9.3 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter............................................... 218
9.4 Customer service ........................................................................................................ 219
9.5 Disposal ...................................................................................................................... 219
4 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Contents
10 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 220

10.1 Wiring diagrams .......................................................................................................... 220
10.2 Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2.......................................................................................... 235
11 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 236
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 247

24745332/EN – 08/2018

General information
1 About this documentation
1 General information
1.1 About this documentation
The current version of the documentation is the original.
This documentation is an integral part of the product. The documentation is written for
all employees who assemble, install, start up, and service this product.
Make sure this documentation is accessible and legible. Ensure that persons respons-
ible for the machinery and its operation as well as persons who work on the product
independently have read through the documentation carefully and understood it. If you
are unclear about any of the information in this documentation or require further in-
formation, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
1.2 Structure of the safety notes

1.2.1 Meaning of signal words
The following table shows the grading and meaning of the signal words for safety
notes.
Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

DANGER Imminent hazard Severe or fatal injuries
WARNING Possible dangerous situation Severe or fatal injuries
CAUTION Possible dangerous situation Minor injuries
NOTICE Possible damage to property Damage to the product or its envi-
ronment
INFORMATION Useful information or tip: Simplifies
handling of the product.
1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes

Section-related safety notes do not apply to a specific action but to several actions
pertaining to one subject. The hazard symbols used either indicate a general hazard
or a specific hazard.
This is the formal structure of a safety note for a specific section:
SIGNAL WORD
Type and source of hazard.
Possible consequence(s) if disregarded.
• Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

General information
Structure of the safety notes 1
Meaning of the hazard symbols
The hazard symbols in the safety notes have the following meaning:
Hazard symbol Meaning

General hazard
Warning of dangerous electrical voltage
Warning of hot surfaces
Warning of risk of crushing
Warning of suspended load
Warning of automatic restart
1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

Embedded safety notes are directly integrated into the instructions just before the de-
scription of the dangerous action.
This is the formal structure of an embedded safety note:
SIGNAL WORD Type and source of hazard. Possible consequence(s) if disreg-
arded. Measure(s) to prevent the hazard.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

General information
1 Rights to claim under limited warranty
1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

Read the information in this documentation. This is essential for fault-free operation
and fulfillment of any rights to claim under limited warranty. Read the documentation
before you start working with the product.
1.4 Product names and trademarks

The brands and product names in this documentation are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective titleholders.
1.5 Copyright notice

© 2018 SEW‑EURODRIVE. All rights reserved. Unauthorized reproduction, modifica-
tion, distribution or any other use of the whole or any part of this documentation is
strictly prohibited.
1.6 Other applicable documentation
1.6.1 DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 AC motors

The following publications and documents have to be observed as well:
• Wiring diagrams provided with the motor
• "Gear Unit Series R..7, F..7, K..7, K..9, S..7, SPIROPLAN® W" operating instruc-
tions for gearmotors
• AC motors catalogs
• Gearmotors catalogs
• Addendum to the operating instructions "Safety Encoders and Safety Brakes, AC
Motors DR.., DRN.., DR2.., EDR.., EDRN.. – Functional Safety"
• "Project Planning for BE.. Brakes" manual – DR.., DRN.., DR2.., EDR.., EDRN..
AC Motors – Standard Brake/Safety Brake"
• If required "MOVIMOT® MM..D Functional Safety" manual 24745332/EN – 08/2018

Safety notes
Preliminary information 2
2 Safety notes
2.1 Preliminary information
The following general safety notes serve the purpose of preventing injury to persons
and damage to property. They primarily apply to the use of products described in this
documentation. If you use additional components, also observe the relevant warning
and safety notes.
2.2 Duties of the user

As the user, you must ensure that the basic safety notes are observed and complied
with. Make sure that persons responsible for the machinery and its operation as well
as persons who work on the device independently have read through the documenta-
tion carefully and understood it.
As the user, you must ensure that all of the work listed in the following is carried out
only by qualified specialists:
• Setup and installation
• Installation and connection
• Startup
• Maintenance and repairs
• Shutdown
• Disassembly
Ensure that the persons who work on the product pay attention to the following regula-
tions, conditions, documentation, and information:
• National and regional safety and accident prevention regulations
• Warning and safety signs on the product
• All other relevant project planning documents, installation and startup instructions,
and wiring diagrams
• Do not assemble, install or operate damaged products
• All system-specific specifications and conditions
Ensure that systems in which the product is installed are equipped with additional
monitoring and protection devices. Observe the applicable safety regulations and le-
gislation governing technical work equipment and accident prevention regulations.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Safety notes
2 Target group
2.3 Target group

Specialist for Any mechanical work may only be performed by adequately qualified specialists. Spe-
mechanical work cialists in the context of this documentation are persons familiar with the design,
mechanical installation, troubleshooting, and maintenance of the product who possess
the following qualifications:
• Qualification in the mechanical area in accordance with the national regulations
• Familiarity with this documentation
Specialist for elec- Any electrotechnical work may only be performed by electrically skilled persons with a
trotechnical work suitable education. Electrically skilled persons in the context of this documentation are
persons familiar with electrical installation, startup, troubleshooting, and maintenance
of the product who possess the following qualifications:
• Qualification in the electrotechnical area in accordance with the national regula-
tions
• Familiarity with this documentation
Additional qualifi- In addition to that, these persons must be familiar with the valid safety regulations and
cation laws, as well as with the requirements of the standards, directives, and laws specified
in this documentation. The persons must have the express authorization of the com-
pany to operate, program, parameterize, label, and ground units, systems, and circuits
in accordance with the standards of safety technology.
Instructed persons All work in the areas of transportation, storage, operation and waste disposal must be
carried out by persons who are trained appropriately. The purpose of the instruction is
that the persons are capable of performing the required tasks and work steps in a safe
and correct manner.
2.4 Designated use

The product is intended for use in industrial and commercial systems.
When installed in machines, startup (i.e. start of designated operation) is prohibited
until it is determined that the machine complies with the local laws and directives.
Air-cooled versions are designed for ambient temperatures of -20 °C to +40 °C and in-
stallation altitudes ≤ 1000 m above sea level. Any differing specifications on the name-
plate must be observed. The ambient conditions must comply with all the specifica-
tions on the nameplate. 24745332/EN – 08/2018

Safety notes
Transportation/storage 2
2.5 Transportation/storage
Inspect the shipment for damage as soon as you receive the delivery. Inform the ship-
ping company immediately about any damage. If the product is damaged, it must not
be assembled, installed or started up.
The lifting eyebolts are designed to carry only the weight of the motor without gear
unit. Tighten installed lifting eyebolts. Mounted gear units have separate suspension
attachments, which must be used according to the gear unit operating instructions
when lifting the gearmotor. Do not mount any additional loads.
The installed lifting eyebolts are in accordance with DIN 580. Observe the loads and
regulations specified there. The tension force vector of the slings must not exceed a
45° angle in accordance with DIN 580.
If necessary, use suitable, sufficiently dimensioned handling equipment.
Observe the information on climatic conditions in chapter "Technical data" of the docu-
mentation.
Observe the following notes when transporting the device:
• Always use lifting eyes if available.
• Ensure that the product is not subject to mechanical impact.
If the product is not immediately installed, it must be stored in a dry and dust-free loca-
tion. The product can be stored for up to 9 months without requiring any special meas-
ures before startup. Do not store the product outdoors.
Do not transport or store the product on the fan guard.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Safety notes
2 Installation/assembly
2.6 Installation/assembly
Note the following points during installation:
• Make sure that the supports are even, the foot and flange mounting is correct and
if there is direct coupling, align with precision.
• Avoid resonance between the rotational frequency and the double supply system
frequency.
• Release brake (for motors with mounted brake).
• Turn the rotor by hand and listen for unusual grinding noise.
• Check the direction of rotation in decoupled state.
• Only install or remove belt pulleys and couplings using suitable devices (heat up).
Cover the belt pulleys and couplings with a touch guard. Avoid unacceptable belt
tension.
• Establish any necessary pipe connections.
• Mounting positions with the shaft end pointing upward must be equipped with a
cover to prevent foreign objects from falling into the fan. Ensure that ventilation
openings are not obstructed and that used air cannot be drawn in again straight
away. The same applies to air from adjacent units.
Also observe the notes in the chapter "Mechanical installation".
2.6.1 Restrictions of use

The following applications are prohibited unless the device is explicitly designed for
such use:
• Use in potentially explosive atmospheres
• Use in areas exposed to harmful oils, acids, gases, vapors, dust, and radiation
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Safety notes
Electrical connection 2
2.7 Electrical connection
All work may only be carried out by qualified personnel. During work, the low-voltage
machine must be at standstill, de-energized, and safeguarded against accidental re-
start. This also applies to auxiliary circuits (e.g. anti-condensation heating or forced
cooling fan).
Check whether the unit is de-energized.
Exceeding the stated tolerances in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, part 1) – voltage ± 5%,
frequency ± 2%, curve shape, symmetry – increases the heating and influences elec-
tromagnetic compatibility. Adhere to the standard EN 50110. Observe other applicable
national regulations, such as DIN VDE 0105 for Germany.
Observe the wiring information and differing data on the nameplate as well as the
provided wiring diagram.
The connection must be a permanently secure electrical connection (no protruding
wire ends). Use the corresponding cable end equipment. Establish a safe PE connec-
tion. When the motor is connected, the distances to non-insulated and live parts must
not be shorter than the minimum values according to IEC 60664 and national regula-
tions. With low voltage, the distances should be no shorter than the following values,
in compliance with IEC 60664:
Nominal voltage VN Distance

≤ 500 V 3 mm
≤ 690 V 5.5 mm
The connection box must be free from foreign objects, dirt, and humidity. Unused
cable entry openings and the connection box itself must be sealed so that they are
dust- and water-proof.
Secure the key(s) for the test run without output elements.
When operating low-voltage machines with brakes, check that the brake is functioning
properly before startup.
Observe the notes in chapter "Electrical installation".
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Safety notes
2 Startup/operation
2.8 Startup/operation
Risk of burns: The surface temperature of the product can exceed 60 °C during opera-
tion. Do not touch the product during operation. Let the product cool down before
touching it.
Do not deactivate monitoring and protection devices of the machine or system even
for a test run.
Depending on the degree of protection, products may have live, uninsulated, and
sometimes moving or rotating parts, as well as hot surfaces during operation.
Make sure that any existing transport protection is removed.
In the event of deviations from normal operation, switch the product off. Possible devi-
ations are increased temperatures, noise, or vibration, for example. Determine the
cause. Contact SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary.
Ensure that the terminal box is closed and screwed down before applying the supply
voltage.
Additional preventive measures may be required for applications with increased haz-
ard potential. Be sure to check the effectiveness of the protection devices after every
modification.
Mechanical blocking or internal protective functions of the product can cause a motor
standstill. Eliminating the cause of the problem or performing a reset may result in the
drive restarting automatically. If, for safety reasons, this is not permitted for the drive-
controlled machine, first disconnect the product from the supply system and then start
troubleshooting.
Operation with fre- The fact that the operation LED and other display elements are no longer illuminated
quency inverter does not indicate that the device has been disconnected from the supply system and
no longer carries any voltage.
Do not touch live components or power connections immediately after disconnecting
the device from the voltage supply because some capacitors may still be charged. Ad-
here to a minimum switch-off time of 10 minutes. Observe the corresponding labels on
the device.
When the device is switched on, dangerous voltages are present at all power connec-
tions as well as at any connected cables and terminals. This also applies even when
the product is inhibited and the motor is at standstill.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor structure
Basic design of DRN63, DR2..63 motors 3
3 Motor structure
The following figures are schematic representations. They are to facilitate the assign-
ment of components to the spare parts list. Motor size and design may cause devi-
ations.
3.1 Basic design of DRN63, DR2..63 motors

[123]
[132]
[131]
[707]
[705]
[113] [706]
[117]
[22]
[115] [116]
[120] [19]
[230]
[216]
[156]
[13]
[9]
[100]
[103]
[106]
[107] [35]
[30]
[42]
[41]
[392]
[109]
[108]
[16]
[1480]
[12]
[3]
[7]
[91] [32]
[36]
[44]
[1]
[2 ]
[90] [11]
[10]
[94]
22297409803
[1] Rotor [22] Hex head screw [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw
[2] Retaining ring [30] Oil seal [103] Stud [131] Gasket for cover
[3] Key [32] Retaining ring [106] Oil seal [132] Terminal box cover
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[7] Flanged endshield [35] Fan guard [107] Oil flinger [156] Information sign
[9] Screw plug [36] Fan [108] Nameplate [216] Hex nut
[10] Retaining ring [41] Equalizing ring [109] Grooved pin [230] Hex nut
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] B-side endshield [113] Cylinder head screw [392] O-ring
[12] Retaining ring [44] Deep groove ball bearing [115] Terminal board [705] Canopy
[13] Cap screw [90] Bed plate [116] Terminal clip [706] Spacer
[16] Stator [91] Hex nut [117] Flat head screw [707] Hex head screw
[19] Pan head screw [94] Flat head screw [120] Support plate [1480] O-ring

Motor structure
3 Basic design of DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors
3.2 Basic design of DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors
[132]
[123]
[131]
[156]
[119]
[117]
[113]
[118] [115]
[116] [262]
[112]
[111] [134]
[129]
[707]
[9] [103] [100] [705]
[706]
[35]
[30]
[42]
[22]
[106] [41]
[392] [32]
[107] [13]
[24] [36]
[108] [3] [44]
[109] [11]
[16] [1480] [10]
[12]
[7]
[2] [1]
[91]
[94] [94]
[90]
[90]
18014411878699915
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [107] Oil flinger [123] Hex head screw
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [108] Nameplate [129] Screw plug with O-ring
[3] Key [36] Fan [109] Grooved pin [131] Gasket for cover
[7] Flanged endshield [41] Equalizing ring [111] Gasket for lower part [132] Terminal box cover
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [112] Terminal box lower part [134] Screw plug with O-ring
[10] Retaining ring [44] Deep groove ball bear- [113] Pan head screw [156] Information sign
ing
[11] Deep groove ball bear- [90] Bed plate [115] Terminal board [262] Terminal clip
ing
[12] Retaining ring [91] Hex nut [116] Terminal clip [392] Gasket
[13] Cap screw [94] Screw [705] Canopy
[16] Stator [100] Hex nut [117] Hex head screw [706] Spacer
[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [118] Lock washer [707] Pan head screw
[24] Lifting eyebolt [106] Oil seal [119] Pan head screw [1480] O-ring
[30] Oil seal
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor structure
Basic structure DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 motors 3
3.3 Basic structure DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 motors
[117] [137]
[219] [262]
[616]
[123] [118]
[132] [116]
[131]
[119] [128]
[140]
[156]
[139]
[112]
[111] [134]
[115] [113] [129]
[390]
[109]
[108]
[24]
[12]
[9]
[7]
[106] [707]
[705]
[107] [706]
[35]
[715]
[30]
[19]
[41] [42] [22]
[17]
[91]
[90] [32]
[100]
[103] [94] [93]
[15] [16] [44]
[36]
[14] [31]
[3] [1]
[11] [2]
[104]
[10]
18014399036804619
[1] Rotor [31] Key [108] Nameplate [132] Terminal box cover
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [109] Grooved pin [134] Screw plug with O-ring
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [111] Gasket for lower part [137] Screw
[7] Flange [36] Fan [112] Terminal box lower part [139] Hex head screw
[9] Screw plug [41] Cup spring [113] Screw [140] Washer
[10] Retaining ring [42] Rear endshield [115] Terminal board [156] Information label
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [219] Hex nut
bearing
[12] Retaining ring [90] Foot [117] Stud [262] Connection terminal
[14] Washer [91] Hex nut [118] Washer [390] O-ring
[15] Hex head screw [93] Washer [119] Cap screw [616] Retaining plate
[16] Stator [94] Cap screw [123] Hex head screw [705] Canopy
[17] Hex nut [100] Hex nut [128] Serrated lock washer [706] Spacer
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[19] Cap screw [103] Stud [129] Screw plug with O-ring [707] Hex head screw
[22] Hex head screw [104] Supporting ring [131] Gasket for cover [715] Hex head screw
[24] Eyebolt [106] Oil seal
[30] Sealing ring [107] Oil flinger

Motor structure
3 Basic structure DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 motors
3.4 Basic structure DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 motors

[117] [137]
[219] [262]
[123] [118] [616]
[116]
[132]
[131]
[156]
[119] [129]
[134]
[112]
[128]
[111] [140]
[113] [139]
[109] [390]
[108] [115]
[24]
[15]
[105]
[9]
[106]
[107]
[707]
[705]
[706]
[715]
[35]
[30]
[25]
[19] [26]
[22] [32]
[42] [36]
[40]
[93]
[90] [44] [43]
[21]
[94] [31]
[103] [7]
[100] [16] [1]
[3]
[11]
[2]
9007200332597387
[1] Rotor [31] Key [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover
[2] Retaining ring [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug
[3] Key [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [137] Screw
[7] Flange [36] Fan [111] Gasket for lower part [139] Hex head screw
[9] Screw plug [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer
[11] Deep groove ball bearing [42] Rear endshield [113] Cap screw [156] Information label
[15] Hex head screw [43] Supporting ring [115] Terminal board [219] Hex nut
[16] Stator [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [262] Connection terminal
bearing
[19] Cap screw [90] Foot [117] Stud [390] O-ring
[21] Oil seal flange [93] Washer [118] Washer [616] Retaining plate
[22] Hex head screw [94] Cap screw [119] Cap screw [705] Canopy
[24] Eyebolt [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [706] Spacer bolt
[25] Cap screw [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [707] Hex head screw
[26] Shield ring [105] Cup spring [129] Screw plug [715] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [106] Oil seal [131] Gasket for cover
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor structure
Basic structure DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors 3
3.5 Basic structure DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors
[137] [262] [616] [156]
[219]
[118]
[123]
[116]
[132]
[117]
[131]
[119]
[112]
[139]
[140]
[111] [128]
[159]
[160]
[161] [19]
[115]
[113] [129] [134] [22]
[24] [1453]
[105]
[9]
[7]
[106]
[107]
[707]
[705]
[706]
[715]
[35] [32]
[26] [25] [40]
[36]
[30]
[42] [43]
[109] [44]
[108] [21]
[94] [31]
[93]
[90] [1]
[15]
[16] [3]
[100]
[103] [11]
[2]
9007206690410123
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [108] Nameplate [134] Screw plug
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [109] Grooved pin [137] Screw
[3] Key [36] Fan [111] Gasket for lower part [139] Hex head screw
[7] Flange [40] Retaining ring [112] Terminal box lower part [140] Washer
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [113] Cap screw [156] Information sign
[11] Deep groove ball [43] Supporting ring [115] Terminal board [159] Connection piece
bearing
[15] Cap screw [44] Deep groove ball [116] Serrated lock washer [160] Connection piece seal
bearing
[16] Stator [90] Foot [117] Stud [161] Hex head screw
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[19] Cap screw [93] Washer [118] Washer [219] Hex nut
[21] Oil seal flange [94] Cap screw [119] Hex head screw [262] Connection terminal
[22] Hex head screw [100] Hex nut [123] Hex head screw [616] Retaining plate
[24] Lifting eyebolt [103] Stud [128] Serrated lock washer [705] Canopy
[25] Cap screw [105] Compression spring [129] Screw plug [706] Spacer bolt
[26] Shield ring [106] Oil seal [131] Gasket for cover [707] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [107] Oil flinger [132] Terminal box cover [715] Hex head screw
[31] Key [1453] Screw plug

Motor structure
3 Basic structure DR..315, DRN315 motors
3.6 Basic structure DR..315, DRN315 motors

[452] [634]
[123] [633]
[132] [151]
[131] [117] [454]
[219]
[119] [128]
[156] [118]
[116] [140]
[112]
[111] [139]
[134] [113] [607]
[129] [115]
[109]
[108]
[707]
[24] [706]
[716]
[705] [715]
[30]
[35]
[26] [25]
[22] [40] [36]
[43]
[17] [42] [32]
[16] [94] [19] [21] [44]
[93] [1] [31]
[15] [90]
[609]
[608] [3]
[11]
[9] [606] [604]
[90] [7] [105]
[93] [94] [250]
[106]
[107]
[2]
[100]
[103]
45035996625703563
[1] Rotor [32] Retaining ring [111] Gasket for lower part [156] Information sign
[2] Retaining ring [35] Fan guard [112] Terminal box lower part [219] Hex nut
[3] Key [36] Fan [113] Cap screw [250] Oil seal
[7] Flange [40] Retaining ring [115] Terminal board [452] Terminal strip
[9] Screw plug [42] B-side endshield [116] Serrated lock washer [454] Mounting rail
[11] Rolling bearing [43] Supporting ring [117] Stud [604] Lubrication ring
[15] Cap screw [44] Rolling bearing [118] Washer [606] Grease nipple
[16] Stator [90] Foot [119] Hex head screw [607] Grease nipple
[17] Hex nut [93] Washer [123] Hex head screw [608] Oil seal flange
[19] Cap screw [94] Cap screw [128] Serrated lock washer [609] Hex head screw
[21] Oil seal flange [100] Hex nut [129] Screw plug [633] End bracket
[22] Hex head screw [103] Stud [131] Gasket for cover [634] End plate
[24] Eyebolt [105] Cup spring [132] Terminal box cover [705] Canopy
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[25] Cap screw [106] Oil seal [134] Screw plug [706] Spacer bolt
[26] Shield ring [107] Oil flinger [139] Hex head screw [707] Hex head screw
[30] Oil seal [108] Nameplate [140] Washer [715] Hex nut
[31] Key [109] Grooved pin [151] Cap screw [716] Washer

Motor structure
Nameplate 3
3.7 Nameplate
The marks on the upper edge of the nameplate are only present when the motor has
been certified accordingly or when it includes the relevant components.
3.7.1 DRN.. motor nameplate

The following figure shows an example of a nameplate:
[1] [1]
[2] DRN90L4/FF [2]

[3] 01.7430446301.0001.17 Inverter duty VPWM 3~IEC60034 [3]
[4] Hz 50 r/min 1461 V 230/400 Δ/Y [4]
[5] kW 1.5 S1 A 5.9/3.4 IE3 [5]
[6] Cosφ 0.74 η100% η75% η50% IP 54 [6]
[7] Th.Kl 130(B) 85.6% 86.1% 84.6% [7]
[8] FF FF165 D200 WE 24X50 [8]

[9] IM B5 [9]
[10] kg 22.878 188 684 3 Made in Germany [10]
9007220942512011
Line Information
[1] • Manufacturer, address
• CE marking
[2] • Type designation
[3] • Serial number
• Suitability for inverter operation
• Number of phases and underlying rating and performance standards
(IEC 60034-X and/or equivalent national standard)
[4] • Rated frequency
• Rated speed
• Nominal voltage
[5] • Rated power, operating mode
• Rated current
• IE class
[6] • Power factor for AC motors
• Degree of protection according to IEC 60034-5
[7] • Thermal class
• Rated efficiency for motors included in the scope of the IEC 60034-30-1
24745332/EN – 08/2018
standard
[10] • Flange
• Shaft end
[11] • Mounting position

Motor structure
3 Nameplate
Line Information
[12] • Weight
• Part number nameplate
• Country of manufacture
3.7.2 DRN.. global motor nameplate
DRN90L4/FF
01.1808089014.0001.16 3~IEC60034
50 Hz r/min 1461 V 220-230Δ/380-420Y IP54 TEFC
kW 1.5 S1 A 6.0/3.45 P.F.0.74 Nom.Eff% 85.6 IE3
kW 1.5 S1 A 5.2/3.0 P.F.0.7 Nom.Eff% 86.5 IE3
60 Hz r/min 1767 254-266Δ/440-460Y K.V.A.-Code M
Th.Kl. 130(B) S.F.1.0 ML 02 Design NEMA A CT 300-1800rpm
FF FF165 D200 WE 24X50
IM B
kg 23.555 AMB C° -20...40 1885723 Made in Germany
9007216697981707
3.7.3 Markings
The following table lists all markings that can be given on a nameplate or attached to
the motor and an explanation of what they mean.
CE mark to state compliance with European guidelines, such as the Low

Voltage Directive.
UR logo to confirm that UL (Underwriters Laboratory) is informed about the

registered components; register number by UL: E189357
DoE mark to confirm compliance with US-American efficiency limit values
for AC motors.
UL logo to confirm that a component is UL (Underwriters Laboratory)

tested, also valid for CSA in conjunction with the register number
CSAe mark to confirm compliance with the Canadian efficiency limit values
for AC motors
CCC logo to confirm the adherence to the Chinese regulation for small ap-
pliances
24745332/EN – 08/2018
VIK mark to confirm the compliance with the directive of the German Asso-
ciation of Energy and Power Industry (V.I.K.)
FS logo with 2-digit number for identification of installed functional safety
motor options
02

Motor structure
Nameplate 3
EAC mark (EurAsian Conformity)
Confirms compliance with the technical regulations of the economic and
customs union of Russia, Belarus, Kazakhstan, Armenia.
UkrSEPRO mark (Ukrainian Certification of Products)
013
Confirms compliance with the technical regulations of the country Ukraine.
EU REGULATION 640/2009 Motors with this mark may only be operated with frequency inverter (VSD =
IE2 USE WITH VARIABLE
SPEED DRIVE ONLY! Variable Speed Drive) according to regulation 640/2009.
BIS mark
Confirmation of compliance with the Indian standard IS 12615.
3.7.4 Serial number

The following table lists the structure of a serial number:
Example: 01. 12212343 01. 0001. 16

01. Sales organization
12212343 Order number (8 digits)
01. Order item (2 digits)
0001 Quantity (4 digits)
16 End digits of the year of manufacture (2 digits)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor structure
3 Type designation
3.8 Type designation

The following diagram shows the structure of the motor type designation:
DRN132M4/BE11/HR/FI/TF
DR Product family
N Code for product line identification
132M Size
4 Number of poles
/BE11 Brake
/HR Manual brake release
/FI Output option
/TF Thermal motor protection
3.8.1 Designation of the motors
Designation
DRS.. Standard motor, Standard efficiency IE1
DR2S.. Standard motor, Standard efficiency IE1 (2nd Generation)
DRE.. Energy-efficient motor, High Efficiency IE2
DRP.. Energy-efficient motor, Premium Efficiency IE3
DRN.. Energy-efficient motor, Premium Efficiency IE3
DRU.. Energy-efficient motor, Super Premium Efficiency IE4
DRL.. Asynchronous servomotor
DRK.. Single-phase operation with running capacitor
DRM.. Torque motor: AC motor for operation at speed n = 0
DR..J Line Start Permanent Magnet motor
63 – 315 Nominal sizes:
63, 71, 80, 90, 100, 112, 132, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250,
280, 315
K, S, M, L, Lengths
MC, LC,
ME, MS, MK, H, LS, LM
R, Q Power designation (identification of motors with the same
P, I size but with different power)
B
2, 4, 6, 8, 8/2, 8/4, 4/2, Number of poles
12
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor structure
Designs and options 3
3.9 Designs and options
3.9.1 Output variants
Designation Description
/FI IEC foot-mounted motor
/F.A /F.B Universal foot-mounted motor
/FG 7series integral motor, as stand-alone motor
/FF IEC flange-mounted motor with bore
/FT IEC flange-mounted motor with threads
/FL General flange-mounted motor (other than IEC)
/FM 7-series integral motor with IEC feet
/FE IEC flange-mounted motor with bore and IEC feet
/FY IEC flange-mounted motor with threads and IEC feet
/FK General flange-mounted motor (deviating from IEC) with feet
/FC C-face flange-mounted motor, dimensions in inch
3.9.2 Mechanical attachments
/BE..1) Spring-loaded brake with specification of size
/HR Manual brake release of the brake, re-engaging
/HF Manual brake release, lockable
/RS Backstop
/MSW MOVISWITCH®
/MM03 – MM40 MOVIMOT®
/MO MOVIMOT® option(s)
/MI Motor identification module for MOVIMOT®
1) Also available in design for functional safety
3.9.3 Temperature sensor / temperature detection
/TF Temperature sensor (PTC thermistor or PTC resistor)
/TH Thermostat (bimetallic switch)
/KY 1 KTY84 – 130 sensor
24745332/EN – 08/2018
/PT 1 or 3 PT100 sensor(s)

/PK PT1000 temperature sensor

Motor structure
3 Designs and options
3.9.4 Encoder
1) 1)
/ES7S /EG7S Add-on speed sensor with sin/cos interface
/EH7S /EV7S
/ES7R /EG7R Add-on speed sensor with TTL(RS422) interface,
/EH7R U = 9 – 26 V
/EI7C1) /EI76 /EI72 Built-in incremental encoder with HTL interface and
/EI71 24/6/2/1 period(s)
/AS7W1) /AG7W1) Add-on absolute encoder, RS485 interface (multi-turn) and sin/
cos interface
/AS7Y1) /AG7Y1) / Add-on absolute encoder, SSI interface (multi-turn) and sin/cos
AH7Y) interface
/ES7A /EG7A Mounting adapter for speed sensors
/EV2T /EV2R Add-on incremental encoder with solid shaft
/EV2S /EV2C
/XV.A Mounting adapter for third-party speed sensors
/XV.. Mounted third-party speed sensors
/XH.A Mounting adapter for third-party hollow-shaft encoders
1) Also available in design for functional safety
3.9.5 Connection alternatives
/IS Integrated plug connector
/ISU Integrated plug connector – Design with only the lower part of
the plug connector
/ASE. HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with single locking
latch (cage clamp contacts on the motor side)
/ASB. HAN 10ES plug connector on terminal box with double locking
latch (cage clamp contacts on the motor side)
/ACE. HAN 10E plug connector on terminal box with single locking
latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
/ACB. HAN 10E plug connector on terminal box with double locking
latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
/AME. /ABE. HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with single
/ADE. /AKE. locking latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
/AMB. /ABB. HAN Modular 10B plug connector on terminal box with double
/ADB. /AKB. locking latch (crimp contacts on the motor side)
24745332/EN – 08/2018
/KCC 6 or 10-pole terminal strip with cage clamp contacts

/KC1 C1-profile-compliant connection of the electrified monorail drive
(VDI guideline 3643), for more compact connection areas.
/IV Other industrial plug connectors according to customer spe-
cifications

Motor structure
Designs and options 3
3.9.6 Ventilation
/V Forced cooling fan
/Z Additional inertia (flywheel fan)
/AL Metal fan
/U Non-ventilated (without fan)
/OL Non-ventilated (closed B-side)
/C Canopy for the fan guard
/LF Air filter
/LN Low-noise fan guard
3.9.7 Bearing
/NS Relubrication device
/ERF Reinforced bearings on A-side with rolling bearing
/NIB Insulated bearing B-side
3.9.8 Condition monitoring
/DUB Mount-on microswitch for monitoring function and wear of the
brake (Diagnostic Unit Brake)
/DUE Eddy-current sensor for function and wear monitoring of the
brake (Diagnostic Unit Eddy Current)
3.9.9 Other additional features
/DH Condensation drain hole
/RI Reinforced winding insulation
/RI2 Reinforced winding insulation with increased resistance
against partial discharge
/2W 2nd shaft end on the motor/brakemotor
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor structure
3 Functional safety
3.10 Functional safety

Drives from SEW‑EURODRIVE are also available with functional safety motor options.
These options are intended for implementation of safety functions in safety-relevant
applications.
SEW‑EURODRIVE labels a functionally safe motor option at the drive with an FS logo
and a 2-digit number on the motor nameplate. The number is a code that indicates
which components in the drive are safety-related. This allows to uniquely identify an
available functionally safe motor option via the motor nameplate.
Available functionally safe motor option

FS logo Decentralized in-
Safety brake Safety encoders
verters
X
01
X
02
X
04
X X
07
X X
11
If the FS logo, e.g. with the code "FS-11" is present on the motor nameplate, the com-
bination of safety encoder and safety brake is available at the motor. If an FS logo is
available, adhere to the information specified in the corresponding documentation.
If the drive bears the FS logo on the nameplate, you must adhere to the information in
the following document:
• Addendum to the operating instructions "Safety Encoders and Safety Brakes, AC
Motors DR.., DRN.., DR2.., EDR.., EDRN.. – Functional Safety"
To determine the safety level for systems and machines yourself, refer to the charac-
teristic safety values in chapter "Characteristic safety values" (→ 2 212).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Mechanical installation
Before you start 4
4 Mechanical installation
INFORMATION
Observe the safety notes in chapter 2 of this documentation for the mechanical in-
stallation.
Functional safety If the drive has the FS logo on the nameplate, observe the information on mechanical
installation in the corresponding addendum to the operating instructions.
4.1 Before you start
INFORMATION
The mounting position for installation must correspond with the specifications on the
nameplate.
Only install the drive if the following conditions are met:

• The specifications on the nameplate of the drive correspond to the supply system
or the output voltage of the frequency inverter
• The drive is undamaged (no damage caused by transport or storage)
• All transport protection has been removed
• You are certain that the following requirements have been met:
– Ambient temperature according to the nameplate.
Note that you can also limit the temperature range of the gear unit (see gear
unit operating instructions).
Any differing specifications on the nameplate must be observed.
– No oils, acids, gases, vapors, dusts, radiations, etc.
– Installation altitude max. 1000 m above sea level
Observe the chapter "Designated use" (→ 2 10) in chapter 2.
– Note the restrictions for encoders
– Special design: Drive configured in accordance with ambient conditions.
The above mentioned information refers to standard orders. The conditions might be
different when you order drives other than the standard. Observe any differing condi-
tions in the order confirmation.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Preliminary work after longer periods of storage
4.2 Preliminary work after longer periods of storage

Depending on the duration and ambient conditions during storage, corrosion, aging of
lubricants, embrittlement of sealing elements, and moisture absorption in the insula-
tion may occur.
Drives that have been stored longer than 9 months may require the following meas-
ures.
Corrosion
• Check for damage to motor and/or components (coating, shafts, connection and
fastening parts).
• Correct corrosion damage.
Embrittlement of seals
• Visually inspect seals and look for tears, hardening, and embrittlement.
• Replace any damaged seals.
Reduced grease service life

If the drives are stored longer than a year, the service life of the bearing grease is re-
duced due to aging and deoiling of the lubricant.
• Check the state and usability of the rolling bearings.
• Replace any damaged rolling bearing.
Reduce grease quantity

• If motors are stored longer than 5 years, regrease them according to the specifica-
tions on the motor nameplate using a relubrication device.
Moisture absorption
• Check to see if the wiring space of the motor is dry and clean.
• Remove moisture and dirt.
• If the motor has absorbed moisture, check the insulation resistance (see chapter
"Measuring the insulation resistance" (→ 2 31)) and dry the motor (see chapter
"Drying the motor" (→ 2 31)).
4.2.1 Checking the brake

If motors with brake have been stored or non-operational for longer than 9 months,
check their function before taking them into operation.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Preliminary work after longer periods of storage 4
4.2.2 Measuring the insulation resistance
The insulation resistance (see following figure) varies greatly depending on the tem-
perature.
If the measured resistance is within the range of the limit characteristic curve (depend-
ing on the ambient temperature), the insulation resistance is sufficient. If the value is
below the limit characteristic curve, dry the motor.
[M ]
100
10
0,1
0 20 40 60 80
[ ˚C ]
173323019
4.2.3 Drying the motor

Proceed as follows to dry the motor:
1. Heat up the motor, either using warm air or using an isolation transformer:
WARNING
Risk of crushing due to torque at the motor shaft.
Severe or fatal injuries.
• Only use warm air for drying DR.. motors with rotor designation "J".
• Do not use an isolation transformer for drying DR.. motors with rotor designation
"J".
With warm air

1. DR.. motors with rotor designation "J" may be dried with warm air only.
2. End the drying process when the minimum insulation resistance is exceeded.
With disconnection switch

1. Connect the windings in series.
2. Auxiliary AC voltage supply max. 10% of the nominal voltage with max. 20% of the
rated current
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Preliminary work after longer periods of storage
Connection with wiring diagram R13
[1]
2336250251
[1] Transformer

[1]
V3 W3 U3
T8 T9 T7
V2 W2 U2
T5 T6 T4
V4 W4 U4
T11 T12 T10
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[2]
2343045259
[1] Motor terminal boards [2] Transformer
W2 W3 U2 U3 V2 V3 [1]
T6 T9 T4 T7 T5 T8
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[2]
2343047179
[1] Motor terminal boards [2] Transformer

24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor installation notes 4
4.3 Motor installation notes
CAUTION
Sharp edges due to open keyway.
Cuts.
• Insert the key into the keyway.
• Pull a protective tubing over the shaft.
NOTICE
Improper assembly may damage the drive and corresponding components.
The drive system might be damaged.
• Observe the following information.
• The motor shaft ends and flange surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned of anti-cor-
rosion agents, contamination or such like (use a commercially available solvent).
Do not allow the solvent to penetrate the bearings or shaft seals – this could dam-
age the material.
• Only install the gearmotor in the specified mounting position on a level, vibration-
free and torsionally rigid support structure.
• Align the motor and the driven machine carefully in order to prevent the output
shaft from being exposed to unacceptable strain. Observe the permitted overhung
and axial loads specified in the "AC Motors" catalog.
• Do not jolt or hammer the shaft end.
• Use an appropriate cover, e.g. option /C "Canopy", to prevent objects or fluids en-
tering motors in vertical mounting positions (M4/V1).
• Make sure that there is sufficient clearance around the motor to provide for ad-
equate cooling air supply, and that the motor does not draw in warm exhaust air
from other units.
• Balance components for subsequent mounting on the shaft with a half key (motor
shafts are balanced with a half key).
• Existing condensation drain holes are sealed with closing plugs. If contaminated,
the condensation drain holes must be checked for proper functioning on a regular
basis and cleaned if required.
• Protect shaft again against corrosion, if necessary.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Motor installation notes
4.3.1 Mounting the motor with aluminum feet

DR.. motors To mount DR.. motors with a foot made of aluminum, you have to use washers with at
least twice the bolt diameter. Use bolts of strength class 8.8. Do not exceed the tight-
ening torque according to VDI 2230-1.
DRN../DR2.. mo- To mount DRN.., DR2.. motors with a foot made of aluminum, you have to use wash-
tors ers with an outer diameter that is at least twice the bolt diameter (e.g.
DIN EN ISO 7090). Use bolts of strength class 8.8 up to max. 10.9. Tightening torque
according to VDI 2230-1. Maximal permitted screw lengths for motors:
Motors Screws
DRN63 – DRN71
M6x20
DR2..63 – DR2..71MS
DRN80 – 90 M8x20
DRN100 – 132S
M10×25
DR2..71M – DR2..80
In case of the DRN/DR2..63 the feet are slotted in the front due to the limited space.
The screws must be inserted in the corresponding bores before the motor is mounted,
or the feet must be fixed using stud bolts.
4.3.2 Installation in damp locations or outdoors

• Use suitable cable glands for the incoming cable (use reducing adapters if neces-
sary) according to the installation instructions.
• If possible, arrange the terminal box in such a way that the cable entries are point-
ing downwards.
• Seal the cable entry properly.
• Clean the sealing surfaces of the terminal box and the terminal box cover carefully
before re-assembly; replace embrittled gaskets.
• If required, touch up the corrosion protection (especially at the eyebolts).
• Check the degree of protection.
• Protect the shaft against corrosion using a suitable anti-corrosion agent.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Installation tolerances 4
4.4 Installation tolerances
Shaft end Flanges

Diameter tolerance according to Centering shoulder tolerance according
EN 50347 to EN 50347
• ISO j6 with Ø ≤ 28 mm • ISO j6 with Ø ≤ 250 mm
• ISO k6 with Ø ≥ 38 mm up to ≤ • ISO h6 with Ø ≥ 300 mm
48 mm
• ISO m6 at Ø ≥ 55 mm
• Centering bore according to DIN 332,
shape DR
4.5 Assembling the input elements

Drive components that are installed on the motor shaft end, e.g. pinions, must be
warmed up prior to assembly in order to prevent damage, e.g. to the encoder of stand-
alone motors.
WARNING
Unsecured key skidding out of the keyway.
Severe or fatal injuries due to flying parts.
• Only operate the motor with attached customer output element (e.g. gear unit), or
with a suitably secured key.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Encoder mounting adapter
4.6 Encoder mounting adapter

If a drive was ordered with encoder mounting adapter, SEW‑EURODRIVE will deliver
the drive with enclosed coupling. Do not connect the coupling for operation without the
encoder.
4.6.1 Encoder mounting adapter XV../EV.. to DR..71 – 225, DRN71 – 225, DR2..71 – 80 motors

If you have ordered the XV.. or EV.. encoder mounting adapter, the adapter [A] and
the coupling [B – E] are enclosed with the motor and are to be assembled by the cus-
tomer.
The following figure shows how to assemble the coupling and the adapter:
[212]
[225]
[E] [D] [C] [B] [A]
[220] [269] [22] [361] / [170]
[226] [E] [D] [C] [B] [A]
[251] [232]
9007202887904779
[22] Screw [361] Safety cover

[170] forced cooling fan guard [269] Grommet
[212] Fan guard with encoder mount [A] Adapter
[220] Encoder [B] Retaining screw
[225] Intermediate flange (not with [C] Central retaining screw
XV1A)
[232] Screws (only with XV1A and [D] Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coup-
XV2A) ling)
[251] Conical spring washers (only with [E] Retaining screw
XV1A and XV2A) [226] Screw
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Encoder mounting adapter 4
Mounting the encoder mounting adapter XV../EV.. to DR..71 – 225, DRN71 – 225, DR2..71 – 80 motors
1. Remove the safety cover [361], or the forced cooling fan if required.
2. For XV2A, XV3A, XV4A: Remove the intermediate flange [225].
3. Screw the coupling [D] to the bore at the shaft end using screw [C].
ð DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Tightening torque 3 Nm.
ð DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225 motors: Tightening torque 8 Nm.
4. Plug adapter [A] onto the pin of encoder [220].
5. Tighten the central retaining screw [B].
ð Tightening torque 3 Nm.
6. For XV2A, XV3A, XV4A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] using the screws
[226].
7. Plug the encoder [220] with adapter [A] onto the coupling [D].
8. Tighten the retaining screw [E].
9. For XV1A, XV2A: Re-install the retaining screws [232] with conical spring wash-
ers.
10. For XV3A, XV4A: Installed by the customer via bores in the encoder plate.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Encoder mounting adapter
4.6.2 XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter

If you have ordered the XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapter, the coupling [233] is en-
closed with the motor and must be installed by the customer.
The following figure shows an example of how the coupling is installed:
[35]
[A]
[1458]
[233]
[225]
[226]
[220]
[251]
[232]
[269]
[361]
[22] [1496]
[1497]
[1498]
[1459] [1489]
[1460] [1461] [1462] [33]

[34]
18014406225445899
[22] Screw [361] Safety cover (normal/long)

[33] Shim [1458]Screw
[34] Screw [1459]Cage nut
[35] Fan guard [1460]Serrated lock washer
[220] Encoder [1461]Shim
[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [1462]Screw
[226] Screw [1489]Ground strap
[232] Screws [1496]Serrated lock washer
(enclosed with .V1A and .V2A)
[233] Coupling [1497]Shim
[251] Conical spring washers [1498]Screw
(enclosed with .V1A and .V2A)
[269] Cable bushing [A] Encoder mounting adapter
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Encoder mounting adapter 4
Mounting encoders to XV../EV.. encoder mounting adapters at DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors
2. Place the coupling [233] onto the pin of encoder mounting adapter [A].
3. Tighten the screw of the coupling [233] via the slots in the encoder mounting ad-
apter.
4. For XV2A, XV3A, XV4A: Mount the intermediate flange [225] to the encoder
mounting adapter [A] using screw [226].
5. For XV1A, XV2A: Insert the screws [232] with conical spring washers [251] in the
encoder mounting adapter [A].
6. Fasten the encoder [220] to the encoder mounting adapter [A] or the intermediate
flange [225].
7. Plug the encoder [220] into the coupling [233].
8. Turn the conical spring washers [255] in the bushings of the encoder [220].
9. For XV1A, XV2A: Tighten the screws [232].
10. Tighten the screw of the coupling [233].
11. Insert the encoder cable into the cable grommet [269].
12. Insert the cable grommet [269] in safety cover [361] or the forced cooling fan.
13. Mount the safety cover [361] onto the forced cooling fan.
4.6.3 XH.A encoder mounting adapter

The XH1A, XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapters for hollow shaft encoders are
premounted on delivery.
To mount the encoder, proceed as described in chapter "Motor and brake mainten-
ance – preliminary work" (→ 2 117).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Terminal box
4.7 Terminal box

4.7.1 Turning the terminal box
The following figure shows the structure of the terminal box variant with terminal
board:
[123]
[131]
[a]
[b]
[c]
[119]
[111]
7362206987
[111]Gasket [a] Terminal

[119]Terminal box [b] Auxiliary terminal
retaining screws (4 x) retaining screws (2 x)
[123]Terminal box cover [c] Retaining plate
retaining screws (4 x)
[131]Gasket
Proceed as follows to turn the terminal box:

1. Loosen the screws [123] from the terminal box cover and remove the cover.
2. Remove the terminals [a], if available.
3. Loosen the retaining screws [119] of the terminal box.
4. Clean the sealing surfaces at the stator shoulder as well as at the terminal box
lower part and cover.
5. Check the gaskets [111 and 131] for damages and replace them if necessary.
6. Position the terminal box as desired. Refer to the appendix for the arrangement of
the auxiliary terminals.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Terminal box 4
WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged cables.
• When installing the terminal box lower part or the terminal board, make sure the
cables are not crushed or twisted.
• Do not use sharp or pointed objects (such as screwdrivers) to align the cables.
• When the assembly is complete, perform an insulation test to make sure the
cables were not damaged. See chapter "Preliminary work after longer periods of
storage" (→ 2 30).
• Observe the correct sequence of the small connection parts.
7. Tighten the screws of the lower part of the terminal box with the following tighten-
ing torques:
• DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors: 5 Nm
• DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225 motors: 27.3 Nm
• DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 motors: 54 Nm
Do not forget the retaining plate [c] if available.
8. Tighten the screws of the terminal box cover with the following tightening torques:
• DR..71 – 132, DRN63 – 132S, DR2..63 – 80 motors: 4 Nm
• DR..160 – 225, DRN132M/L – 225 motors (aluminum design): 11.3 Nm
• DR..160 – 225, DRN132M/L – 225 motors (gray-cast iron design): 27.3 Nm
• DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 motors: 54 Nm
Make sure the gasket is seated properly.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Terminal box
4.7.2 Terminal box with NPT thread

In terminal boxes with NPT thread, cable glands cannot always be screwed in all the
way (up to the O-ring).
NPT
14949925387
For use in wet areas, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends using metric screw fittings.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet 4
4.8 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet
4.8.1 DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors

The following figure shows a motor with option /F.A (retrofit foot).
22845053579
The contact surfaces at the foot [90] and stator [16] are painted.
1. Remove the paint from the stator [16] contact surface where the foot is supposed
to be screwed on. Refer to the illustration on terminal box positions below for se-
lecting the contact surfaces.
2. Apply a thin layer of corrosion protection to the contact surfaces after the paint has
been removed. The possible terminal box positions are shown below:
0° 270° 180°
24745332/EN – 08/2018
22845056011
3. Remove the paint from the contact surfaces of the foot [90]. Apply a thin layer of
corrosion protection to the contact surfaces after the paint has been removed.

4 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet
4. Attach the foot [90] to the motor using the screws [94] and washers [91]. Tighten
the screws in diametrically opposite sequence. The screws are micro-encapsu-
lated. This is why you have to screw in and tighten the screws quickly.
5. If necessary, you can apply paint or corrosion protection at the joint after attaching
the foot [90].
Changing the motor foot position

For converting the motor foot to another position, observe the following points:
• After screwing out the screws [94], check them for damages at the threads etc..
• When the motor foot position sis changed, apply corrosion protection to the un-
painted surfaces.
Tightening torques
Motor Screw Tightening torque

DRN71 – 90, DR2..71 – 80 M6 11.3 Nm
DRN100 – 132S M8 27.3 Nm
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4.8.2 DR..250 – 315, DRN..225 – 315 motors
The following figure shows a motor with option /F.A (retrofit feet).
[16]
[90]
[1457]
18014406536422539
[16] Stator [1457] Set screw

[90] Foot Remove the paint from the marked sur-
faces.
The tapped holes of the foot mounting surfaces are closed with set screws [1457]. The
contact surfaces at the feet [90] and stator [16] are painted.
1. Remove the set screws [1457]. Only remove the set screws from those threads
into which you will screw the foot screws [94]. DR..250/280, DRN250/280: 4 set
screws, DRN315: 6 set screws.
2. Remove the paint from the stator [16] contact surface where the feet are supposed
to be screwed on (see marking in the "Example illustration DR..280"). For
DR..250/280, DRN250/280 motors, there are 8 surfaces, for DRN315, motors
there are 12. Refer to the illustration on terminal box positions below for selecting
the contact surfaces.
3. Apply a thin layer of corrosion protection to the contact surfaces after the paint has
been removed. The possible terminal box positions are shown below:
0° 270° 180°
24745332/EN – 08/2018
9007211165643403

4 Retrofitting (option /F.A) or modifying (option /F.B) motor feet
4. Remove the paint from the contact surfaces of the feet [90] (see marking in the
"Example illustration DR..280"). Apply a thin layer of corrosion protection to the
contact surfaces after the paint has been removed.
5. Attach the feet [90] to the motor using the screws [94] and washers [93]. The
screws are micro-encapsulated. This is why you have to screw in and tighten the
screws quickly.
6. If necessary, you can apply paint or corrosion protection at the joint after attaching
the foot [90].
Tightening torques
Motor Screw Tightening torque

DRN225 M16 230 Nm
DR..250/DRN250 M20 464 Nm
DR..280/DRN280 M20 464 Nm
DR..315/DRN315 M20 464 Nm
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4.8.3 Changing motor feet positions
[16]
[90]
[93]
[94]
9007206996709387
[16] Stator [93] Shim

[90] Foot [94] Screw
For converting the motor feet to another position, observe the following points:
• After screwing out the screws [94], check them for damages at the threads etc..
• Remove the old micro-encapsulation.
• Clean the threads of the screws [94].
• Apply a high-strength thread locker to the screw threads [94] before inserting the
screws again.
• The set screws removed from the new mounting position can be reused for the
bores of the old mounting position. After inserting the set screw [1457] into the
open tapped holes in the stator [16], paint or corrosion protection can be applied
on the bare joining surfaces.
• When the motor foot positions are changed, apply corrosion protection to the un-
painted surfaces.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Direct mounting of a motor on a gear unit
4.9 Direct mounting of a motor on a gear unit
INFORMATION
Secure all pinions on the motor or input shaft with Loctite® 649 even if a retaining ring
is additionally present.
If the pinion is already fastened to the shaft, start cleaning the sealing surface
(step 6).
Joining the pinion 1. Clean and degrease the shaft and the bore of the pinion.
to the motor or in- 2. Apply Loctite® 649 to the shaft after the securing hole over the entire area of the
put shaft circumference.
9
ite
64
®
ct
Lo
22763067787
3. Warm the pinion up to at least 100 °C to a maximum of 130 °C.

4. Push the pinion onto the shaft.
5. Secure the pinion on the shaft with the retaining ring.
Cleaning the seal- 6. Remove oils, grease, irregularities of the surface, rust and old Loctite® residue
ing surfaces from the flange surfaces.
Sealing threads To prevent oil from escaping after installation, flange threads that lead into the housing
that lead into the interior must be sealed!
housing interior
7. Clean and degrease thread through bores that lead into the housing interior and
their studs.
8. Apply Loctite® 574 or Loctite® 5188 (selection according to the table at the end of
the chapter) in a continuous ring on the upper threads of the flange thread and the
stud.
[*]
ite ®
ct
Lo tit
e®
c
Lo
24745332/EN – 08/2018
22795758347
®
[*] Loctite according to the table at the end of the chapter
Screwing in the 9. Screw the studs into the thread up to the shoulder.
studs

Direct mounting of a motor on a gear unit 4
10. Remove any excess Loctite® (see following diagram) from the sealing surface
60 minutes after screwing in at the latest.
22347379211
Sealing the flange
surface
INFORMATION
Always apply the sealant over a large area in narrow places and on the gear units
R97, R107, R127, F97 or F107.

11. Only distribute Loctite® 574 or Loctite® 5188 (selection according to the table at the
end of the chapter) to one of the sealing surfaces. Apply the sealant in beads or
over a large area without gaps. Use a suitable application tool that does not con-
taminate the sealing surface, for example, a non-shedding brush or a short-hair
lamb’s wool roller.
Joining flange sur- 12. Join the flange surfaces together. Next, immediately tighten the nuts with the spe-
faces cified torque (see the table at the end). If you tighten the nuts too late, the sealing
film can tear.
13. The sealant must harden for 30 minutes and must not come into contact with the
gear oil.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Direct mounting of a motor on a gear unit
4.9.1 Tightening torques
Screw/nut Tightening torque

Nm
M6 11.3
M8 27.3
M10 54
M12 93
M16 230
4.9.2 Selection and use of Loctite®
Sealant Use Suitability Batch size Part num-

ber
Loctite® 649 Locking agent for All gear units
50 ml 09120998
pinions
All gear units except
Loctite® 574 for R97 – R127, F97, 7 ml 09102558
Surface sealing F107
agent
R97 – R127, F97,
Loctite® 5188 50 ml 03207013
F107
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 4
4.10 Options
4.10.1 /HR, /HF Manual brake release

The option manual brake release /HR, /HF is preinstalled and set at the factory for
some brake sizes. If your drive was not delivered with manual brake release and you
wish to retrofit it, observe the instructions in chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual
brake release" (→ 2 161).
Activating and loosening the /HF manual brake release

You can use the option /HF (lockable manual brake release) to continuously mechan-
ically release the BE.. brake with a set screw and a releasing lever.
On delivery, the set screw is inserted far enough to not fall out and to not affect the
brake performance. The set screw is self-locking. This prevents it from unintended
turning in or from falling out.
In case of BE03 brakes, the set screw is stored in the grommets between the stator
fins.
WARNING
No brake function due to incorrect brake installation.
• Only qualified specialists may perform work on the brake.
• Before startup, make sure that the hand lever has been removed to prevent unin-
tentional brake release during operation.
Proceed as follows to activate the lockable /HF manual brake release:

1. Screw in the set screw until there is no more clearance at the releasing lever.
2. BE03: Screw in the set screw by 1/2 to 1 revolution in order to manually release
the brake.
3. BE05 – BE122: Screw in the set screw by 1/4 or 1/2 revolution in order to manu-
ally release the brake.
Proceed as follows to loosen the lockable /HF manual brake release:
4. BE03: Remove the set screw completely from the thread. Fasten the set screw us-
ing the grommets between the stator ribs.
5. BE05 – BE122: Loosen the set screw at least until the floating clearance of the
manual brake release has completely returned, see chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /
HF manual brake release" (→ 2 161).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Options
Activating the /HR manual brake release

You can use the option /HF manual brake release to mechanically release the BE..
brake for a short time via a combination of releasing lever and hand lever. It is de-
signed with a spring mechanism, so that it reengages automatically.
During the assembly the mechanics inside the fan guard is preset at the factory. A
hand lever is included in the delivery that is attached to the stator housing.
WARNING
No brake function due to incorrect brake installation.
• Only qualified specialists may perform work on the brake.
• Before startup, make sure that the hand lever has been removed to prevent unin-
tentional brake release during operation.
Proceed as follows to activate the /HR manual brake release:

1. Remove the hand lever from the stator housing.
2. Screw the thread of the hand lever completely into the thread of the releasing
lever.
3. To release the brake, pull the hand lever in the direction away from the terminal
box. The correct direction of use is indicated by an arrow symbol on the fan guard
or on the closing part on the fan guard opening.
INFORMATION
The releasing procedure can be performed with usual force application, do not apply
too much force to the lever to avoid damage to the drive.
Proceed as follows to loosen the /HR manual brake release:

1. Let go of the lever in actuated state. The lever reengages to the initial position and
the brake is applied.
2. Screw out the hand lever and attach it to the stator housing.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 4
4.10.2 Air filter /LF
The air filter, a filter fleece, is installed in front of the fan grille. It can be easily re-
moved and installed for cleaning purposes.
The attached air filter avoids that dust and other particles drawn in by the air flow are
distributed. It also prevents that the ducts between the cooling fins become clogged
with dust.
In very dusty environments, the air filter protects the cooling fins from dirt or from be-
coming clogged.
The air filter must be cleaned or replaced depending on the amount of dust in the envi-
ronment. No maintenance intervals can be specified due to the individuality of each
drive and the environment where it is installed.
Technical data Air filters

Approvals All certifications
Ambient temperature -40 °C to +100 °C
Suitable for the following motors DR..71 – 132
Filter material Viledon PSB290SG4
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Options
4.10.3 Mounting adapter for measuring nipple

Depending on the respective order specifications, SEW‑EURODRIVE delivers the
drives as follows:
• With bore
• With bore and included measuring nipples for vibration measurement.
The following figure shows a motor with bores and inserted measuring nipples [1]:
[1]
[1]
9007201960947467
[1] Bore with inserted measuring nipples
Proceed as follows to connect the customer measuring device:

• Remove the protective plugs from the bores.
• Insert the measuring nipple in the bores of the motor and screw in the measuring
nipple with a tightening torque of 15 Nm.
• Plug the mounting adapter of the measuring unit into the measuring nipple.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 4
4.10.4 Second shaft end with optional cover
SEW‑EURODRIVE delivers motors with the 2nd shaft end option /2W with the key in-
serted and secured by transport protection.
WARNING
Unsecured key skidding out of the keyway.
Severe or fatal injuries due to flying parts.
• Only operate the motor with a suitably secured key.
WARNING
Rotating shaft end or attachments.
• Only start the motor with installed protective cover at the second shaft end.
The protection cover must meet the impact resistance requirements of EN 60079‑0
(VDE 0170-1):2014-06, chapter 26.4.2.
As an option, SEW‑EURODRIVE can also provide the safety cover [361] for the 2nd
motor shaft end already installed at the EDR.71 – 280 and EDRN63 – 280 motors.
This is not included in the delivery as standard.
The following figure shows the dimensions of the optional cover.
[361]
L1
EA
DA
[4]
[34]
LB/LBS 1) X
18014402029073931
[4] Keyway [361] Safety cover

[34] Tapping screw LB/LBS Length of the motor/brakemotor
1) Refer to the "AC Motors" catalog for dimen-
sions
24745332/EN – 08/2018

4 Options
Dimensions
Motors DA EA L1 X
DR.. DRN.. DR2.. mm mm mm mm
– DRN63 DR2..63 11 23 2 78
– DRN63 /BE DR2..63 /BE
DR..71 DRN71 DR2..71 11 23 2 91.5
DR..71 /BE DRN71 /BE DR2..71 /BE 88
DR..80 DRN80 DR2..80 14 30 2 95.5
DR..80 /BE DRN80 /BE DR2..80 /BE 94.5
DR..90 DRN90 – 14 30 2 88.5
DR..90 /BE DRN90 /BE – 81
DR..100 DRN100 – 14 30 2 87.5
DR..100 /BE DRN100 /BE – 81
DR..112 – 132 DRN112 – 132S – 19 40 3.5 125
DR..112 – 132 /BE DRN112 – 132S /BE – 120.5
DR..160 DRN132M/L – 28 60 4 193
DR..160 /BE DRN132M/L /BE – 187
DR..180 DRN160 – 180 – 38 80 4 233
DR..180 /BE DRN160 – 180 /BE – 236
DR..200 – 225 DRN200 – 225 – 48 110 5 230
DR..200 – 225 /BE DRN200 – 225 /BE – 246
DR..250 – 280 DRN250 – 280 – 55 110 3 243.5
DR..250– 280 /BE DRN250 – 280 /BE –
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Electrical installation
5
5 Electrical installation
If components with functional safety are installed in the motor, observe the following
safety note:
WARNING
Disabling functional safety devices.
• Only qualified personnel is allowed to carry out work on functional safety com-
ponents.
• Any work on functional safety components must be carried out by strictly ob-
serving the specifications in the operating instructions at hand and the respective
addendum to the operating instructions. Otherwise, the warranty will become
void.
WARNING
Electric shock due to incorrect installation.
• Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947‑4‑1 for
switching the motor.
• Use switch contacts to switch the brake. Depending on brake type and type
design, the switch contacts meet the specifications in the following utilization cat-
egories:
– Switch contacts for the supply voltage for operation with AC voltage: AC-3 ac-
cording to EN 60947-4-1, or AC-15 according to EN 60947-5-1.
– Switch contact for the supply voltage for operation with DC voltage: Preferably
AC-3 or DC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1. As an alternative, contacts in utiliz-
ation category DC-13 according to EN 60947-5-1 are also permitted.
– Switch contacts for optional cut-off in the DC circuit: AC-3 according to
EN 60947-4-1.
• When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instruc-
tions in the frequency inverter operating instructions.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams
5.1 Wiring diagrams and terminal assignment diagrams

Connect the motor as shown in the wiring connection diagrams provided with the mo-
tor. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
INFORMATION
Do not connect or start up the motor if the wiring diagram is missing.
5.2 Wiring notes

During installation observe the safety notes in chapter 2 and 5.
5.2.1 Protecting the brake control system against interference

Brake cables must always be routed separately from other unshielded power cables
with phased currents to prevent interference with brake control. In particular, power
cables with phased currents include:
• Output cables from frequency inverters and servo inverters, soft start units and
brake units
• Supply cables for braking resistors and similar options
For line-operated motors and when using AC and DC circuit cut-off, the connection
between the brake rectifier and the external switch contact must be in a different
power cable that is separate from the motor power supply.
5.2.2 Protecting the motor protection devices against interference

Adhere to the following points to protect motor protection devices by
SEW‑EURODRIVE against interference:
• You may route separately shielded supply cables together with switched-mode
power cables in one cable.
• Do not route unshielded supply cables together with switched-mode power lines in
one cable.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter 5
5.3 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter
When motors are powered from inverters, you must observe the wiring instructions is-
sued by the inverter manufacturer. You must also observe the operating instructions
for the frequency inverter.
5.3.1 Motors with SEW‑EURODRIVE frequency inverter

Operation of the motor on SEW‑EURODRIVE frequency inverters has been tested.
The required dielectric strength values of the motors were confirmed and the startup
routines adjusted to the motor data. You can operate the motor with any frequency in-
verter from SEW‑EURODRIVE. To do this, start up the motor as described in the op-
erating instructions for the frequency inverter.
5.3.2 Motor with non-SEW inverter

Operating SEW‑EURODRIVE motors on third-party frequency inverters is permitted if
the pulse voltages at the motor terminals indicated in the following figure are not ex-
ceeded.
2.2
U LL [kV]
[1]
2.0 [2]
[8] 1.8
[3]
1.6
[4]
1.4
[5]
1.2 [6]
1.0
0.8
0.6
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 1.2 1.4
[7] [µs]
9007203235332235
[1] Permitted pulse voltage for DR.., DRN.. motors with reinforced insulation and in-
creased resistance against partial discharge (/RI2)
[2] Permitted pulse voltage for DR.., DRN.. motors with reinforced insulation (/RI)
[3] Permitted pulse voltage according to NEMA MG1 part 31, VN ≤ 500 V
[4] Permitted pulse voltage according IEC 60034‑25, limit value curve A for nominal
voltage VN ≤ 500 V, star connection
[5] Permitted pulse voltage according IEC 60034‑25, limit value curve A for nominal
voltage VN ≤ 500 V, delta connection
[6] Permitted pulse voltage according to IEC 60034‑17
[7] Voltage rise time
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[8] Permitted pulse voltage
The insulation class depends on the voltage.

• ≤ 500 V = standard insulation
• ≤ 600 V = /RI
• > 600 V – 690 V = /RI2

5 Special aspects for operation with a frequency inverter
INFORMATION
Compliance with the following limit values must be checked and considered:
• The supply voltage level at the third-party inverter
• The threshold of the brake chopper voltage
• The operating mode of the motor (motor mode/generator mode)
→ If the permitted pulse voltage is exceeded, you must install limiting measures,
such as filters, chokes or special motor cables. Consult the manufacturer of the
frequency inverter.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding 5
5.4 Exterior grounding at the terminal box, LF grounding
In addition to the interior PE connection, a LF grounding cable can be attached to the
outside of the terminal box. It is not installed as standard.
LF grounding can be ordered as completely pre-installed at the factory. For this an
aluminum or gray cast iron terminal box designed for brake connections is required for
DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors. For DR..160 – 225, DRN132M –
225 motors, this option can be combined with all terminal box types.
The option can be combined with "HF grounding" (→ 2 62).
INFORMATION
All parts of the LF grounding kit are made from stainless steel.
DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors
[1]
9007207279069579
[1] LF grounding at the terminal box
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225 motors
[1]
24745332/EN – 08/2018
8026938379
[1] LF grounding at the terminal box

5 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding
5.5 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding

For improved, low-impedance grounding at high frequencies, we recommend using
the following connections with corrosion protected connection elements:
HF grounding is not installed as standard.
The HF grounding option can be combined with LF grounding at the terminal box.
If you require LF grounding in addition to HF grounding, you can connect the con-
ductor to the same point.
The HF grounding option can be ordered as follows:
• Completely pre-assembled at the factory
• As "grounding terminal" kit for customer installation; part numbers listed in the fol-
lowing table.
Motors Part number of "Grounding ter-

minal" kit
DRN63, DR2..63 21014817
DR..71 – 100M, 21015988
DRN71 – 100LS,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..100L – 132, DRN100L – 132S 13633945
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225
with aluminum terminal box
INFORMATION
If 2 or more ground straps are used, you have to attach them with a longer screw.
The specified tightening torques refer to a strap thickness of t ≤ 3 mm.
5.5.1 DRN63, DR2..63 motors with HF(+LF) grounding

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
24745332/EN – 08/2018
22297406859
[1] Use of the pre-cast bore at the [4] Ground strap (not included in the deliv-
stator housing ery)
[2] Serrated lock washer [5] Self-tapping screw DIN 7500 M5 × 16,
tightening torque 5 Nm
[3] Disk ISO 7093

Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding 5
5.5.2 DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
8026768011
stator housing ery)
[3] Disk ISO 7093
5.5.3 DR..90, DRN90 motors with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
8026773131
24745332/EN – 08/2018
stator housing ery)
[3] Disk ISO 7093

5 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding
5.5.4 DR..100M, DRN100LS motors with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
18014402064551947
stator housing ery)
[3] Disk ISO 7093 tightening torque 10 Nm
5.5.5 DR..100L – 132, DRN100LM – 132S motors with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
18014402064551947
[1] Use of tapped hole for lifting eyes [4] Ground strap (not included in the deliv-
ery)
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[2] Serrated lock washer DIN 6798 [5] Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 × 18,
[3] Washer ISO 7089/ISO 7090

Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding 5
5.5.6 DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 motors with HF(+LF) grounding
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[5]
9007202821668107
[1] Use of the tapped holes at the terminal box

[2] Serrated lock washer DIN 6798
[3] Washer ISO 7089/ISO 7090
[4] Ground strap (not included in the delivery)
[5] • Hex head screw ISO 4017 M8 × 18 (with aluminum terminal boxes of DR..160
– 225, DRN132M – 225 motors), tightening torque 10 Nm
• Hex head screw ISO 4017 M10 × 25 (with gray cast iron terminal boxes of
DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 225 motors), tightening torque 10 Nm
• Hex head screw ISO 4017 M12 x 30 (terminal boxes of DR../DRN250 – 315
motors), tightening torque 15.5 Nm
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Special aspects in switching operation
5.6 Special aspects in switching operation

When the motors are used in switching operation, possible interference of the
switchgear must be excluded by ensuring suitable wiring. According to EN 60204
(electrical equipment of machines), motor windings must have interference suppres-
sion to protect the numerical or programmable logic controllers. As it is primarily
switching operations that cause interference, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends in-
stalling protective circuit in the switching devices.
If the drive has been delivered with a suppressor circuit in the motor, you must ob-
serve the provided wiring diagram.
5.7 Special aspects of torque motors and low-speed motors

Due to the design of torque motors and low-speed motors, very high induction
voltages may be generated when they are switched off. Consequently,
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends using the varistor circuit shown below for protection.
The size of the varistors depends, among other factors, on the starting frequency –
note the project planning.
U U U
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
2454566155
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Special aspects of DRK.. single-phase motors 5
5.8 Special aspects of DRK.. single-phase motors
Scope of delivery and motor design

DRK.. single-phase motors are delivered with installed running capacitor in the ter-
minal box. Starting relay, centrifugal switch or start-up capacitor are not supplied.
[112]
[1660]
[1659]
[131]
[277 / 1667]
[132]
[123]
9007211192388619
[112] Terminal box [277]/[1667] Capacitor

[1660] Seal [132] Terminal box cover
[1659] Adapter piece [123] Screw
[131] Seal
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Special aspects of DRK.. single-phase motors
5.8.1 Connecting DRK.. single-phase motors
WARNING
Electric shock due to charged capacitor.
• After disconnection from the power supply, wait 5 seconds before opening the
terminal box.
DRK.. single-phase motors are delivered with 1 or 2 installed and connected running
capacitors. The data specified in the chapter "Technical Data" (→ 2 213) apply.
INFORMATION
If a running capacitor installed by SEW‑EURODRIVE must be replaced, only use ca-
pacitors with the same technical data.
INFORMATION
Start-up against the complete rated torque is not possible with only the running capa-
citors.
Parts which are not supplied must be ordered from specialist retailers and must be
connected according to the corresponding instructions and "wiring dia-
grams" (→ 2 234).
Proceed as follows during connection:
• Remove terminal box cover [132]
• Remove adapter piece [1659] with the running capacitors [277]/[1667]
• Perform the connection according to supplied wiring diagrams.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Notes regarding the connection of the motor 5
5.9 Notes regarding the connection of the motor
INFORMATION
It is essential to comply with the valid wiring diagram. Do not connect or start up the
motor if this wiring diagram is missing. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams free
of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
WARNING
Danger due to contaminated terminal box.
• Seal the terminal box and unused cable entries against dust and humidity.
• Remove present foreign objects, dirt and humidity from the terminal box.
Observe the following points when connecting the motor:

• Check cable cross section
• Arrange terminal links correctly
• Screw on the connections and the PE conductor correctly
• Make sure that the connection cables are not cramped to avoid damage to the
cable insulation.
• Observe air gaps, see chapter "Electrical connection" (→ 2 13)
• In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
• Perform the connection in accordance with the enclosed wiring diagram
• Avoid protruding wire ends
• Connect the motor according to the prescribed direction of rotation
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Connecting the motor via terminal block
5.10 Connecting the motor via terminal block
5.10.1 According to wiring diagram R13
Arrangement of terminal links with W connection

[1]
[2]
[3]
U1
V1
)
(T1
W1
(T2
[4]
)
(T3
[5]
27021598003155723
Arrangement of terminal links with m connection
DR..71 – 280, DRN63 – 280, DR2..63 – DR../DRN250 – 315 motors

80 motors (double-sided supply):
(single-sided supply):
[1] [6]
)
(T6
)
(T4
[1]
W2
)
U2
(T5
)
(T6
[2]
)
(T4
V2
W2
[3]
)
U2
(T5
U1
[2]
V1
V2
)
(T1
[3]
)
W1
(T2
[4]
U1
V1
)
(T3
)
(T1
W1
)
[4]
(T2
)
(T3
[5]
9007199493672075
[6]
9007199734852747
[1] Terminal link [4] Terminal board

[2] Terminal studs [5] Customer connection
[3] Flange nut [6] Customer connection with divided connec-
tion cable
24745332/EN – 08/2018
INFORMATION
For DR../DRN250 – 315 motors, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends a double-sided
supply for load currents higher than
• M12: 250 A
• M16: 315 A

Connecting the motor via terminal block 5
3
/W
/U3
W2
U2
T6/T [2]
/V3
9
V2
T4/
T7
U1
T5/T
V1
8
[3]
T1
W1
T2
[4]
T3
[5]
2319075083
Arrangement of terminal links with WW connection
[1]
W2
[2]
U2
T6
V2
T4
U3
V3
T5
U1
V1
[3]
W3
T1
T7
T2
W1
T8
T3
T9 [4]
[5]
9007201591100811
[1] Terminal link [4] Terminal board

[2] Terminal studs [5] Customer connection
[3] Flange nut
INFORMATION
Three winding lead ends must be rewired to change from high to low voltage:
The lines designated U3 (T7), V3 (T8) and W3 (T9) must be reconnected.
• U3 (T7) from U2 (T4) to U1 (T1)
• V3 (T8) from V2 (T5 ) to V1 (T2)
• W3 (T9) from W2 (T6) to W1 (T3)
→ Changing from low to high voltage is carried out in reverse order. In both cases,
24745332/EN – 08/2018
the customer connection is made to U1 (T1), V1 (T2) and W1 (T3). You can
change the direction of rotation by interchanging 2 supply cables.


V3/T
8W
3/T9
/T5
U3/T
7
V2
/T4
U2
1
/T1
V4
[1]
[2]
[3]
0
/T1
V1/T
U4
1 [6]
V1/T
2 W1
/T3
[4]
[5]
18014400828555147
Arrangement of terminal links with mm connection
DR..71 – 280, DRN63 – 280, DR2..63 – DR../DRN250 – 315 motors

80 motors (double-sided supply):
(single-sided supply):
L2 [5]
L3
V3/T L1
8W
3/T9
V3/T
8W
/T5
U3/T 3/T9
7
V2
/T5
T1 U3/T
7
V2
T1
/T4
U2
/T4
1
U2
/T1
V4
1
/T1
[1]
V4
[2] [1]
[3] [2]
0
/T1
V1/T
U4
[6] [3]
0
1
/T1
V1/T V1/T
U4
2W
1/T3 L1 1 [6]
[4] V1/T
2 W1
/T3
[4]
L2
[5]
L3
[5]
18014400845874315
9007208157343883
[1] Terminal link [6] Wiring designation plate

[2] Terminal studs L1 Conductor 1
[3] Flange nut L2 Conductor 2
[4] Terminal board L3 Conductor 3
[5] Customer connection
INFORMATION
24745332/EN – 08/2018
For DR../DRN250 – 315 motors, SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends a double-sided

supply for load currents higher than
• M10: 160 A

5.10.4 Connection variants via terminal block
The motors are supplied and connected differently depending on the electrical design.
Arrange the terminal links as shown in the wiring diagram and screw them on firmly.
Observe the tightening torques specified in the following tables.
DRN63, DR2..63 motors
Terminal Tightening torque Port Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE connec- PE design
studs hex nut tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M4 1.6 Nm ≤ 1.5 mm2 1a Conductor end Pre-assembled ter- M4 6
sleeve minal links
≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter-
minal links
≤ 6 mm2 1b Ring cable lug Pre-assembled ter-
minal links
≤ 6 mm2 2 Ring cable lug Connection ac-
cessories enclosed
DR..71 – 100, DRN71 – 100, DR2..71 – 80 motors

Terminal Tightening torque Port Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE connec- PE design
studs hex nut tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M4 1.6 Nm ≤ 1.5 mm2 1a Conductor end Pre-assembled ter- M5 4
sleeve minal links
≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter-
minal links
minal links
cessories enclosed
M5 2.0 Nm ≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter-
Conductor end minal links
sleeve
minal links
cessories enclosed
M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac-
cessories enclosed
DR..112 – 132, DRN112 – 132M motors

Terminal Tightening torque Customer Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE connec- PE design
studs hex nut connection tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M5 2.0 Nm ≤ 2.5 mm2 1a Solid wire Pre-assembled ter- M5 4
Conductor end minal links
sleeve
minal links
cessories enclosed
M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac-
24745332/EN – 08/2018
cessories enclosed
DR..160, DRN132L motors

stud hex nut connection tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M6 3.0 Nm ≤ 35 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac- M8 5
cessories enclosed

DR..160, DRN132L motors

stud hex nut connection tion screw
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
cessories enclosed
DR..180 – 225, DRN160 – 225 motors

Terminal Tightening torque Customer Design Connection type Scope of delivery PE terminal PE design
studs hex nut connection stud
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
cessories enclosed
M10 10 Nm ≤ 95 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac- M10 5
cessories enclosed
cessories enclosed
DR../DRN250 – 280 motors

Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M10 10 Nm ≤ 95 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Connection ac- M12 5
cessories enclosed
cessories enclosed
DR../DRN315 motors
Ø Cross sec- Ø
tion
M12 15.5 Nm ≤ 95 mm2 3 Ring cable lug Premounted con- M12 5
M16 30 Nm ≤ 120 mm2 nection pieces
The designs in bold print apply to S1 duty cycle for the standard voltages and stand-
ard frequencies according to the data in the catalog. Other designs may have different
connections, for example, different terminal stud diameters and/or a different scope of
delivery.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Variant 1a
[2]
[1]
[1]
[3]
≥ 8 – 10 mm [4]
[5]
[6]
M4: > 2.5 mm2
M5: > 2.5 mm2
27021597853089931
[1] External connection [4] Terminal link

[2] Terminal stud [5] Terminal washer
[3] Flange nut [6] Winding connection with Stocko terminal
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Variant 1b:
[2] [1]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
18014398598346763
[1] External connection with ring cable lug, [4] Terminal link
according to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234,
for example
[2] Terminal stud [5] Terminal washer
[3] Flange nut [6] Winding connection with Stocko
terminal
Variant 2
[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
[6] [4]
[7]
9007199440180363
[1] Terminal board [5] Bottom nut

[2] Flange nut [6] Terminal washer
[3] Terminal link [7] Winding connection
[4] External connection with ring cable lug, according to DIN 46237 or DIN 46234,
for example
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Variant 3
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7] [8]
9007199454382091
[1] External connection with ring cable [5] Terminal link

lug, according to DIN 46237 or
DIN 46234, for example
[2] Terminal stud [6] Bottom nut
[3] Upper nut [7] Winding connection with ring cable lug
[4] Washer [8] Serrated lock washer
Variant 4
[5]
[4]
[5]
[2] [2] [4]
[3]
[2] [3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
18014399649088651
[1] Terminal box [4] Lock washer

[2] Terminal clip [5] Hex head screw
[3] PE conductor
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Variant 5
[1]
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[6]
1139608587
[1] Hex nut [4] Serrated lock washer

[2] Washer [5] Stud
[3] PE conductor on cable lug [6] Terminal box
Variant 6
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] [5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
22297412747
[1] Terminal box [4] Terminal clip

[2] Support plate [5] Flat head screw
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[3] PE conductor

Connecting the motor plug connector 5
5.11 Connecting the motor plug connector
5.11.1 IS/ISU plug connector
1009070219
The lower part of the /IS, /ISU plug connector option is completely wired at the factory
including the additional feature such as brake control.
The upper connector section of the /IS option is included in the delivery. It must be
connected according to the wiring diagram.
The /ISU option is delivered without upper connector section.
The /IS, /ISU plug connector option has CSA approval up to 600 V. Note for applica-
tion according to CSA regulations: Tighten the M3 clamping screws with a tightening
torque of 0.5 Nm.
Cable cross section

Make sure that the type of cable complies with the applicable regulations. The rated
currents are specified on the nameplate. The cable cross sections that can be used
are listed in the following table.
Without vari- With variable Link cable Double assignment

able terminal terminal link (Motor and brake/SR)
link
0.25 – 4.0 mm2 0.25 – 2.5 mm2 Max. 1.5 mm2 max. 1 x 2.5 and 1 x 1.5 mm2
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Connecting the motor plug connector
Wiring the upper section of the plug connector

• Loosen the housing cover screws:
– Remove the housing cover
• Loosen the screws from the upper section of the plug connection:
– Remove upper connector section from the cover
• Strip the insulation off the connection cable:
– Strip off about 9 mm of insulation
• Pass the cable through the cable gland
Wiring up as shown in wiring diagram R83

• Connect the lines as shown in the wiring diagram:
– Tighten the clamping screw with a tightening torque of 0.5 Nm.
• Install the plug connector (see chapter "Installing the connector" (→ 2 82))
Wiring up as shown in wiring diagram R81

For Wor mstartup:
• Connect with 6 lines:
– Tighten the clamping screws carefully.
– Motor contactors in the control cabinet
For Wor moperation:
• Connect as shown in the wiring diagram
• Install the variable terminal link as shown in the following figures according to the
required motor operation (W or m).
9007200053347851
24745332/EN – 08/2018
9007200053349515

Brake control system BSR – preparing the variable terminal link
For Woperation:
On the W side of the variable terminal link as shown in the following figure: Remove
only the bare metal pin of the marked prong horizontally – install a touch guard!
9007200053520139
For moperation:
On the m side of the variable terminal link as shown in the following figure: Com-
pletely remove two prongs horizontally.
9007200053518475
Wiring according to the R81 wiring diagram for W or m operation with double terminal assignment
• At terminal for double assignment:
– Connect the link cable
• When operation is as required:
– Insert the link cable in the variable terminal link
• Installing the variable terminal link
• At terminal for double assignment:
– Connect the motor lead above the variable terminal link
• Connect the other lines as shown in the wiring diagram
9007200053521803
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Installing the plug connector

The housing cover of the IS plug connector can be screwed onto the lower housing
part depending on the required position of the cable lead. You have to install the upper
part in the housing cover according to the position of the lower part:
1. Define the required mounting position.
2. Install the upper section of the plug connector into the housing cover in accord-
ance with the mounting position.
3. Close the plug connector.
4. Tighten the cable gland.
5. Check all screws of tightening and contact connections for tight fit.
WARNING
No grounding due to incorrect installation.
• Tighten the retaining screws of the IS plug connector properly with 2 Nm as
these screws also act as protective earth contacts.
IS female connector 9007200053719819
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Mounting position of the upper section of the plug connector in the housing cover
9007200053526155
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5.11.2 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS.. plug connectors
1009065611
The installed AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.. and AS.. connector systems are based on
the connector systems made by Harting.
• AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.. Han Modular®
• AC.., AS.. Han 10E / 10ES
The connectors are located at the side of the terminal box. They are locked either us-
ing two clamps or one clamp on the terminal box.
The internal motor wiring is performed at the factory according to the order informa-
tion. The mating connector must be prefabricated by the user.
The mating connector (grommet housing) with socket contacts is not included in the
delivery.
INFORMATION
The degree of protection is only guaranteed if the mating connector is plugged in and
locked.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Connecting the motor via terminal strip 5
5.12 Connecting the motor via terminal strip
5.12.1 KCC terminal strip

• In accordance with the wiring diagram provided
• Check the max cable cross section:
– 4 mm2, rigid
– 4 mm2, flexible
– 2.5 mm2, flexible with conductor end sleeve
• In the terminal box: Check winding connections and tighten them if necessary
• Strip 10 – 12 mm of insulation
Arrangement of terminal links for W connection
18014399506064139
Arrangement of terminal links for m connection

24745332/EN – 08/2018
18014399506066059

5 Connecting the motor via terminal strip
5.12.2 KC1 terminal strip

• Perform the connection in accordance with the enclosed wiring diagram
• Check the maximum cable cross section:
– 2.5 mm2 rigid
– 2.5 mm2 flexible
– 1.5 mm2 flexible with conductor end sleeve
• Strip 8 – 9 mm of insulation
9007200257397387
9007200257399307
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Connecting the brake 5
5.13 Connecting the brake
The BE.. brakes are powered by energized DC voltage and are released electrically.
The brake is applied mechanically when the voltage supply is disconnected.
WARNING
Delayed brake application or unintentional brake release due to incorrect control or
connection.
Severe or fatal injuries, e.g. due to falling hoist.
• Comply with the applicable regulations issued by the relevant employer's liability
insurance association regarding phase failure protection and the associated cir-
cuit/circuit modification.
• Connect the brake according to the enclosed wiring diagram.
• In case of emergency off, always disconnect all poles of the brake control from
the supply voltage.
• Only use suitable contactors with sufficient contact rating (utilization category ac-
cording to EN 60947‑4‑1/EN 60947‑5‑1, see "Brake voltage supply" (→ 2 89)).
• For contactor selection, observe the inductive load to switch, and the high current
load while switching the brake.
5.13.1 Connecting the brake control

The brake is powered by a brake control system with protection circuit. The brake con-
trol is either installed in the motor's terminal box or in the control cabinet. When the
motor is prepared for the brake control in the control cabinet, the brake supply cables
are connected to a terminal strip in the motor terminal box.
Usually screw terminals are used as terminals on the terminal strip or on the brake
control. Terminals with cage clamp can also be used.
The connectable cable cross sections are restricted to 2.5 mm2. In case you use larger
cable cross sections due to application reasons, additional intermediate terminals
must be used.
The brake is internally connected to the motor PE. An additional connection for the
brake is not necessary.
WARNING
Delayed brake application or unintentional brake release due to incorrect control or
connection.
Severe or fatal injuries, e.g. due to falling hoist.
• Observe the specifications of this documentation for connecting the brake.
• If you are uncertain about brake control, voltage supply type and design, or over-
voltage and short circuit protection, contact the plant manufacturer or
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Connecting the brake
5.13.2 Permitted brake controls
INFORMATION
The following specifications refer to motors designed for operation at ambient tem-
peratures of -20 °C to +40 °C, and with thermal class 130 (B) or 155 (F). Deviations
may occur depending in the installed motor options.
In individual cases, always also observe the additional specifications in the order con-
firmation and on the motor nameplate.
The brake is designed for operation with AC voltage or DC voltage, depending on the
design. A brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE is used that is either installed in the mo-
tor terminal box or in the control cabinet.
BE03 – 2 brakes can also be operated without brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE
with DC voltage. Observe the information on the motor nameplate. In this case, a suit-
able overvoltage protection must be installed at the terminal strips in the terminal box
using varistors. The varistors are not included in the delivery of the motor. Observe the
project planning notes from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
The following brake control types are not permitted:
• Operation with AC voltage without brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE with
BE03 – BE122 brakes.
• Operation with DC voltage without brake control by SEW‑EURODRIVE with BE5 –
BE122 brakes.
• Operation with third-party brake control.
For an overview of available brake controls by SEW‑EURODRIVE and of the technical
data, refer to chapter "Brake control" (→ 2 192).
WARNING
Severe or fatal injuries
Great and unexpected elongation of the stopping distance.
• Operate each brake with a separate brake control.
• Observe the notes on dimensioning in the catalog, or contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
5.13.3 Optional separation of DC and AC circuits

In case of brakes operated with AC voltage, make sure the disconnection type desig-
nated by the manufacturer is applied correctly during the brake connection. The fol-
lowing types are distinguished:
• Cut-off in just the AC circuit with normal application time
• Cut-off in AC circuit and DC circuit with shortened application time
The correct switch-off type must be ensured by a respective wiring. Certain brake con-
24745332/EN – 08/2018
trols by SEW-EURODRIVE realize the same AC and DC cut-off via integrated switch-
ing relays (e.g. BMP1.5), or via mounted relays (e.g. BSR or BUR).
The switch-off type is specified on the included wiring diagrams by a pictogram.

WARNING
Delayed brake application or unintentional ongoing brake release due to incorrect
switch-off.
Severe or fatal injuries, e.g. due to falling hoist or extended coasting.
• During project planning, consider the required cut-off type and the effects on the
expected stopping distance in particular.
• Only use the faster cut-off in the DC and AC circuit for hoists and hoist-like ap-
plications.
• When you are not sure if the application is a hoist-like application, contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Make sure that the configured cut-off type (AC or AC-DC) is implemented cor-
rectly during startup, regardless of the type of application.
5.13.4 Brake voltage supply

In general, the brake voltage supply must match the values specified on the motor
"Nameplate" (→ 2 21). The brake must be supplied via the designated brake control.
The specifications on the nameplate have a tolerance of +/-5% of the stated nominal
value, or of the mean value of the stated connection range. Observer order-specific
deviations.
Make sure the voltage supply is sufficiently stable by using cable cross sections and
voltage sources that are dimensioned accordingly. Make sure the supply voltage does
not drop below 90% of the nominal value during the starting procedure. This may be
caused by an increased inrush current (see chapter "Operating currents" (→ 2 184)).
In case of single-speed drives (not pole-changing) operated directly at the supply sys-
tem (meaning without frequency inverter or soft start devices), the brake supply
voltage can also be taken from the terminal board of the motor. Adhere to the follow-
ing restrictions:
• The nominal brake voltage must either match the phase-to-neutral voltage, or the
phase-to-phase voltage of the motor (observe nameplate and motor switching
type).
• In case of hoists or hoist-like applications the BSR brake control must be used for
cut-off in the DC and AC circuits.
• For combinations with BMP3.1 brake control (BE60 – 122) a voltage supply via the
terminal board is not permitted.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5.13.5 Switching equipment

The high current utilization during switching the brake (inductive load) requires suit-
able contactors/switch contacts, to obtain the correct function of the brake.
Depending on brake type and type design, the switch contacts must meet the specific-
ations in the following utilization categories:
• Switch contacts for the supply voltage at AC voltage operation: AC-3 according to
EN 60947-4-1, or AC-15 according to EN 60947-5-1.
• Switch contact for the supply voltage at DC voltage operation: Preferably AC-3 or
DC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1. As an alternative, contacts in utilization category
DC-13 according to EN 60947-5-1 are also permitted.
• Switch contacts for optional separation on DC side: AC-3 according to
EN 60947-4-1.
Observe the specifications on the provided wiring diagram.
Using a semi-conductor relay is not permitted.
5.13.6 Damage protection against overvoltage and short circuit

To obtain protection against overvoltage damages (e.g. due to short circuit), a suffi-
ciently dimensioned fusing must be used at the supply cables.
Observe the notes on dimensioning in the catalog, or contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5.13.7 Connecting diagnostic unit /DUB
Connect the diagnostic unit as shown in the wiring connection diagrams provided with
the motor. The maximum permitted connection voltage is AC 250 V with a maximum
current of 6 A. With low voltage the maximum voltage is AC 24 V or DC 24 V with
max. 0.1 A. A subsequent change to low voltage is not permitted.
Function monitoring Wear monitoring Function and wear monit-

oring
[1] [1] [1]
[3]
[2]
[2] [2]
BN1
BN1 BN1
BU1
BU1 BU1
[4]
BN2 [2]
BU2
[1] Brake [1] Brake [1] Brake

[2] Microswitch [2] Microswitch [2] Microswitch
MP321-1MS MP321-1MS MP321-1MS
[3] Function monitoring
[4] Wear monitoring
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5.13.8 Connecting the diagnostic unit /DUE option for function and wear monitoring
The /DUE diagnostic unit (Diagnostic Unit Eddy Current) is a contactless measuring
system for function and wear monitoring of the brake and the continuous measure-
ment of the current working air gap.
The measuring system consists of:
• Sensor, integrated in the magnet body of the brake
• Evaluation unit in the motor terminal box that is supplied via a DC 24 V voltage.
If the diagnostic unit /DUE was ordered, the function and wear monitoring is installed
and calibrated at the factory. The customer must connect the diagnostic unit, see wir-
ing diagram. The switching point of the wear monitoring is preset to the maximally per-
mitted value. According to the table in chapter "Evaluation unit" (→ 2 168), a reduced
value can also be set.
For the state of the evaluation unit, refer to chapter "Status display of the evaluation
unit" (→ 2 176).
For information on retrofitting the diagnostic unit /DUE, refer to chapter "Retrofitting
the diagnostic unit /DUE for function and wear monitoring".
Connecting the evaluation unit

The maximum permitted cable cross section at terminals "[k]" of the evaluation unit is
1.5 mm2 with conductor end sleeve without plastic collar, 0.75 mm2 with plastic collar.
The recommended cable cross section at terminals "[k]" is 0.5 mm2 with conductor
end sleeve with plastic collar.
INFORMATION
Use shielded cables to wire the evaluation unit. Connect the shield to the GND poten-
tial, or use the shield plate at the user's signal evaluation.
SEW‑EURODRIVE recommends routing the power cable of the drive and the cable
of the diagnostic unit separately.
• Unless they are shielded, sensor cables must always be routed separately from
other power cables with phased currents.
• Provide for a suitable equipotential bonding between drive and control cabinet.
Important characteristics of the cable used are:

• Total shielding (outer shield) of the cable
• 100 m maximum length for fixed installation
• 50 m maximum length for cable carrier installation
The required number of cores depends on the type of function/signals that are to be
transferred to the higher-level controller and then processed.
At the factory, the diagnostic unit /DUE is pre-installed, calibrated and set to the wear
limit permitted for the brake. The diagnostic unit has to be calibrated again after ser-
vice or maintenance work such as sensor replacement or replacement of the evalu-
24745332/EN – 08/2018
ation electronics. The calibration can be take place directly at the evaluation electron-
ics (at the terminal box) or alternatively via the higher-level controller. In the second
case, the required signals for calibration have to be routed to the higher-level control-
ler.

The reference ground GND and the reference ground analog output AGND have the
same potential. In case this potential is not treated separately in the application,
AGND is not necessary.
Number of required Function Abbreviation

cores
Voltage supply DC 24 V
3 Reference ground GND
Digital output function FCT
3 Reference ground GND
Digital output wear WEAR
Reference ground GND
4
4
Analog output current air gap OUT
Reference ground analog output AGND
6
8
Calibration zero value ZERO
Calibration of infinite value INF
24745332/EN – 08/2018
INFORMATION
If the calibration inputs ZERO and/or INF are routed to the outside to a PLC or a con-
troller, they have to be continuously connected to AGND in normal operation to avoid
EMC interferences in the calibration cables.

INFORMATION
Signal outputs of the evaluation unit /DUE that are switched may not be used as
voltage supply for other evaluation units /DUE or comparable systems. Each evalu-
ation unit /DUE has to be supplied separately.
Designation of the components

The system comprises a sensor and single-channel evaluation unit. The function mon-
itoring of the brake is realized via a digital signal (NO contact). A digital output (NC
contact) signals if the wear limit was reached. Further, a current output allows for con-
tinuous monitoring of the brake wear.
[1]
11k
0k
DC 24V
1
[6] 9k
GND
8k
AGND
7k
6k
INF
ZERO
5k
WEAR1
4k
FCT1
OUT1
6s
5s
B1
4s
GND1
A1
[5]
95 6 09
211
[2]
-00
E-1K
DU
[4]
[3]
14950549515
[1] Terminals 4k – 11k

[2] LEDs for function and wear, brake
[3] DIP switches S1 – S5
[4] Fastening of terminal box (PE)
[5] Line clip
[6] Terminals 4s – 6s
The connection designation of the terminals are as follows:
Terminal Designation Description Color coding

4s A1 Sensor 1 connection 1 Brown (BN)
5s GND1 Sensor 1 shield Black (BK)
24745332/EN – 08/2018
6s B1 Sensor 1 connection 2 White (WH)
Terminal Designation Description

4k OUT1 Analog output working air gap brake
5k FCT1 Digital output function brake
6k WEAR1 Digital output wear brake

Terminal Designation Description
7k ZERO Input calibration zero value
8k INF Input calibration infinite value
9k AGND Signal ground AGND
10k GND Ground potential GND
11k DC 24 V DC 24 V supply
The LEDs have the follow meaning:
LEDs Designation Description

Green [2] FCT1 The brake is open. Electromagnet is active. Pressure
plate is in contact with magnet body.
Red [2] WEAR1 The current working air gap of the brake reached or ex-
ceeded the preset maximum working air gap.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Options
5.14 Options
Connect the options as shown in the wiring connection diagrams provided with the
motor. You can obtain the valid wiring diagrams free of charge from
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
INFORMATION
Do not connect any options if the wiring diagram is missing.
5.14.1 Temperature sensor /TF
NOTICE
Impermissible heating of the motor due to defective /TF temperature sensor.
Damage to property.
• Do not connect any voltages > 30 V to the /TF temperature sensor.
• Observe the provided wiring diagram for the connection of the temperature
sensor /TF.
The PTC thermistors comply with DIN 44082.

Resistance measurement (measuring instrument with V ≤ 2.5 V or I < 1 mA):
• Standard measured values: 20 – 500 Ω, hot resistance > 4000 Ω
When using the temperature sensor for thermal monitoring, the evaluation function
must be activated to maintain reliable isolation of the temperature sensor circuit. The
thermal protection function must become active in case of overtemperature.
If there is a 2nd terminal box for the TF temperature sensor, this is where you must
connect the temperature sensor.
Observe the provided wiring diagram for the connection of the TF temperature sensor.
If the wiring diagram is missing, you can obtain it from SEW-EURODRIVE free of
charge.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 5
The below figure shows the characteristic curve of the /TF with reference to the nom-
inal response temperature (referred to as TNF).
R [Ω]
4000
1330
550
250
[T]
-20°C
TNF - 20 K
TNF - 5 K
TNF + 5 K
TNF + 15 K
TNF
5470153483
5.14.2 TH winding thermostats

The thermostats are connected in series and open when the permitted winding tem-
perature is exceeded. They can be connected in the drive monitoring loop.
VAC VDC
Voltage V in V 250 60 24
Current (cos ϕ = 1.0) in A 2.5 1.0 1.6
Current (cos ϕ = 0.6) in A 1.6
Contact resistance max. 1 Ω at DC 5 V / 1 mA
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Options
5.14.3 Temperature detection /KY (KTY84 – 130)
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature detection as well as the motor winding.
• Use currents > 3 mA in the KTY circuit.
• Observe the correct connection of the KTY to ensure correct evaluation of the
temperature detection.
• Observe the polarity during connection.
The characteristic curve in the following figure shows the resistance curve subject to
the motor temperature with a measuring current of 2 mA and correct pole connection:
3000
2500
2000
R [Ω] 1500
1000
500
0
-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 -250 300 350
T [°C]
1140975115
Technical Data KTY84 – 130

Connection Red (+)
Blue (−)
Total resistance at 20 – 25 °C 540 Ω < R < 640 Ω
Test current < 3 mA
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 5
5.14.4 Temperature sensor /PT (PT100)
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature detection can damage the insulation of
the temperature detection as well as the motor winding.
• Avoid currents > 3 mA in the circuit of the PT100.
• Observe the correct connection of the PT100 to ensure correct evaluation of the
the motor temperature.
300
250
200
R [Ω] 150
100
50
0
-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
T [°C]
1145838347
Technical Data PT100

Connection Red/white
Resistance at 20 – 25 °C per PT100 107.8 Ω < R < 109.7 Ω
Test current < 3 mA
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Options
5.14.5 Temperature detection /PK (PT1000)
NOTICE
Excessive self-heating of the temperature sensor can damage the insulation of the
temperature detection as well as the motor winding.
• Avoid currents > 3 mA in the circuit of the PT1000.
• Observe the correct connection of the PT1000 to ensure correct evaluation of the
the motor temperature.
3000
2500
2000
R [Ω] 1500
1000
500
0
-100 -50 0 50 100 150 200 250
T [°C]
17535480203
Technical Data PT1000

Connection Black/red
Resistance at 20 – 25 °C per PT1000 1077 Ω < R < 1098 Ω
Test current < 3 mA
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 5
5.14.6 Forced cooling fan /V
• Connection in separate terminal box
• Max. connection cross section 3 × 1.5 mm2 (3 × AWG 15)
• Cable gland M16 × 1.5
Motors Operating mode/connec- Frequency Voltage

tion Hz V
DR..71 – 132, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 50 100 – 127
DRN71 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC W 50 175 – 220
DRN71 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC m 50 100 – 127
DRN71 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 180, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 50 230 – 277
DRN71 – 180,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC W 50 346 – 500
DRN71 – 315,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC m 50 200 – 290
DRN71 – 315,
DR2..71 – 80
1) Steinmetz circuit
Motors Operating mode/connec- Frequency Voltage

tion Hz V
1)
DR..71 – 132, 1 ~ AC (m) 60 100 – 135
DRN71 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC W 60 175 – 230
DRN71 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 132, 3 ~ AC m 60 100 – 135
DRN71 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 180, 1 ~ AC1) (m) 60 230 – 277
DRN71 – 180,
DR2..71 – 80
24745332/EN – 08/2018
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC W 60 380 – 575
DRN71 – 315,
DR2..71 – 80
DR..71 – 315, 3 ~ AC m 60 220 – 330
DRN71 – 315,
DR2..71 – 80
1) Steinmetz circuit

5 Options
Motors Operating mode/connec- Voltage

tion V
DR..71 – 132, DC 24 V 24
DRN80 – 132,
DR2..71 – 80
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the V forced cooling fan, refer to chapter "Forced
cooling fan /V" (→ 2 232).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 5
5.14.7 UWU52A switched-mode power supply
The forced cooling fan type V for DC 24 V includes the UWU52A switched-mode
power supply, if you have ordered it. It can be ordered using the part number from
SEW‑EURODRIVE even after the order has been placed.
The following figure depicts the UWU52A switched-mode power supply:
76
101 38
111
576533259
Input: AC 110 – 240 V; 1.04 – 0.61 A; 50/60 Hz

DC 110 – 300 V; 0.65 – 0.23 A
Output: DC 24 V; 2.5 A (40 °C)
DC 24 V; 2.0 A (55 °C)
Connection: Screw terminals 1.5 – 2.5 mm2, separable
Degree of protec- IP20; attachment to EN 60715 TH35 mounting rail in the control cab-
tion: inet
Part number: 0188 1817
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Options
5.14.8 Overview of add-on encoders

Refer to the wiring connection diagrams on information on how to connect add-on en-
coders:
En- Motors Encoder Mounting type Supply Signal Wiring dia-

coder type DC V gram
ES7S DR..71 – 132, Incremental Shaft-centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08

DRN80 – 132S
ES7R DR..71 – 132, Incremental Shaft-centered 7 – 30 TTL (RS422) 68179xx08
DRN80 – 132S
ES7C DR..71 – 132, Incremental Shaft-centered 4.5 – 30 HTL/TTL (RS422) 68179xx08
DRN80 – 132S
AS7W DR..71 – 132, Absolute Shaft-centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos+ 68181xx08
DRN80 – 132S value RS485
AS7Y DR..71 – 132, Absolute Shaft-centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos + SSI 68182xx07
DRN80 – 132S value
EG7S DR..160 – 280, Incremental Shaft-centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08
DRN132M – 280
EG7R DR..160 – 280, Incremental Shaft-centered 7 – 30 TTL (RS422) 68179xx08
DRN132M – 280
EG7C DR..160 – 280, Incremental Shaft-centered 4.5 – 30 HTL/TTL (RS422) 68179 xx08
DRN132M – 280
AG7W DR..160 – 280, Absolute Shaft-centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos+ 68181xx08
DRN132M – 280 value RS485
AG7Y DR..160 – 280, Absolute Shaft-centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos + SSI 68182xx07
DRN132M – 280 value
EH7S DR../DRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 10 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 08511xx08
EH7C DR../DRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 10 – 30 HTL 08511xx08
EH7R DR../DRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 10 – 30 TTL (RS422) 08511xx08
EH7T DR../DRN315 Incremental Shaft-centered 5 TTL (RS422) 08511xx08
AH7Y DR../DRN315 Absolute Shaft-centered 9 – 30 TTL (RS422) +SSI 08259xx07
value
EV7S DR..71 – 225, Incremental Flange centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos 68180xx08
DRN80 – 225
EV7R DR..71 – 225, Incremental Flange centered 7 – 30 TTL (RS422) 68179xx08
DRN80 – 225
EV7C DR..250/280, Incremental Flange centered 4.5 – 30 HTL/TTL (RS422) 68179xx08
DRN250/280
AV7W DR..250/280, Absolute Flange centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos+ 68181xx08
24745332/EN – 08/2018
DRN250/280 value RS485

AV7Y DR..250/280, Absolute Flange centered 7 – 30 1 Vss sin/cos + SSI 68182xx07
DRN250/280 value

Options 5
INFORMATION
• Maximum oscillation load for encoders ≤ 10 g ≈ 100 m/s2 (10 Hz to 2 kHz)
• Shock resistance = 100 g ≈ 1000 m/s2 for DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S motors
• Shock resistance = 200 g ≈ 2000 m/s2 for DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 motors
5.14.9 Overview of optical status messages for built-in encoders
INFORMATION
For information on how to connect the built-in encoder, refer to the wiring diagram.
• Observe chapter "Wiring diagrams" (→ 2 220) for connection via terminal strip.
• Observe the enclosed wiring diagram for connection via M12 connectors.
Encoder Motors Supply Signals

in VDC
EI71 DR..71 – 132 9 – 30 HTL 1 period/revolu-
DRN71 – 132S tion
EI72 DR2..71 – 80 9 – 30 HTL 2 periods/revolu-
tion
DRN63 (only EI7C)
EI76 9 – 30 HTL 6 periods/revolu-
tion
EI7C 9 – 30 HTL 24 periods/re-
volution
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Options
EI7. B – visual feedback

The EI7. encoders use 2 bi-colored LEDs (red + green each) for visual feedback on
the operating state.
LED H1 (at cable output of the encoder) – status and errors

The green LED indicates the status or the configuration of the encoder. It flashes. The
flashing frequency indicates the set number of periods.
LED H1 green
Frequency Status/configuration
LED off Encoder without voltage or faulty
0.6 Hz EI71 (1 period per revolution)
1.2 Hz EI71 (2 periods per revolution)
3 Hz EI76 (6 periods per revolution)
15 Hz EI7C (24 periods per revolution)
LED lit continuously Encoder defective
The red LED is lit when the error detects an error.
LED H1 red
Flash code Meaning
10 s with 1 Hz and 2 s continu- No valid number of periods can be set
ous
other Output driver signals a fault (e.g. short circuit or
overtemperature)
The H2 LED gives visual feedback on the signal track status.
LED color Track A Track B Track A Track B

Orange (green and red) 0 0 1 1
Red 0 1 1 0
Green 1 0 0 1
Off 1 1 0 0
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Options 5
5.14.10 Installation notes for encoders
When connecting the encoders to the inverters, observe the provided wiring diagrams
and the information in these operating instructions as well as the operating instruc-
tions/wiring diagrams of the respective inverter and the operating instructions/wiring
diagrams provided with the third-party encoder if applicable.
Proceed according to chapter "Motor and brake maintenance" to connect the en-
coders mechanically. Observe the following notes:
• Maximum line length (inverter to encoder):
– 100 m with a capacitance per unit length conductor – shield ≤ 110 nF/km
– 100 m with a capacitance per unit length conductor – conductor ≤ 85 nF/km
• Core cross-section: 0.20 – 0.5 mm2; recommendation ≥ 0.25 mm2
• Use shielded cable with twisted pair conductors and apply shield over large area
on both ends:
– In the cable gland of the encoder connection cover or in the encoder connector
– To the inverter on the electronics shield clamp and to the housing of the D-sub
connector
• Install the encoder cables separately from the power cables, maintaining a dis-
tance of at least 200 mm.
• Compare the operating voltage with the permitted operating voltage range on the
encoder nameplate. Deviations in the operating voltage may overheat and damage
the encoder.
• SEW-EURODRIVE recommends the use of stabilized voltage sources and separ-
ate supply systems for encoder or other sensor components and active compon-
ents such as switches and light barriers.
• Supplies with voltage transients and interferences higher than the supply voltage
UB are not permitted.
• Observe the clamping area of 5 to 10 mm of the cable gland of the connection
cover. If you use cables with a different cross section, you have to replace the
provided cable gland with another suitable EMC-compliant cable gland.
• The cable glands for the cable entry must meet the following conditions:
– Cramping area is suitable for the used cable(s)
– The IP degree of protection of the encoder connection is at least as high as the
IP degree of protection of the actual encoder
– The operating temperature range matches the designated ambient temperature
range.
• Check the flawless state and the proper seat of the connection cover gasket.
• Tighten the screws of the connection cover with a tightening torque of 2.25 Nm.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

5 Options
Minimum requirements for encoder cables

Make sure that self-assembled cables fulfilled the following requirements:
• Cross section of voltage supply cable:
– At least 0.25 mm2 for cable lengths up to 50 m.
– At least 0.5 mm2 for cable lengths up to 100 m.
• Cross section of the signal wire:
– At least 0.25 mm2.
• Capacitance per unit length:
– Maximum 70 pF/m - core/core.
– Maximum 120 pF/m - core/shield.
• The cable must be shielded.
• Differential signals must be routed via twisted wires e.g. Data+ and Data-.
5.14.11 Anti-condensation heating

To protect a shutdown motor from freezing up (rotor blockage) or condensation inside
the motor, it can be equipped with an optional anti-condensation heating. The anti-
condensation heating consists of strip heaters that are integrated in the winding over-
hang and supplied with voltage when the motor is switched off. The motor is heated by
the current flowing through the strip heaters.
The strip heaters are controlled according to the following principle:
• Motor switched off → anti-condensation heating activated
• Motor switched on → anti-condensation heating deactivated
Observe the permitted voltage according to the nameplate and the enclosed terminal
assignment diagram.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Startup
6
6 Startup
INFORMATION
• It is essential to comply with the safety notes in chapter 2 during installation.
• In case of problems, refer to the chapter "Malfunctions" (→ 2 214).
safety note:
WARNING
ponents.
void.
WARNING
Electric shock due to incorrect installation.
• Use switch contacts in utilization category AC-3 according to EN 60947-4-1 for
switching the motor.
• When motors are powered by inverters, you must adhere to the wiring instruc-
tions in the frequency inverter operating instructions.
CAUTION
The surfaces on the drive can be very hot during operation.
Risk of burns.
• Let the motor cool down sufficiently before you start working on it.
NOTICE
The maximum limit torque (Mpk) and the maximum current (Imax) may not be ex-
ceeded, not even for acceleration.
• Limit the maximum current at the inverter.
24745332/EN – 08/2018
INFORMATION
Limit the maximum speed at the inverter. For information on the procedure, refer to
the documentation of the inverter.

Startup
6 Before startup
INFORMATION
For using DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors with BE brake and encoder, observe
the following information:
• Only operate the brake as holding brake.
• The brake may only be applied when the speed is ≤ 20 1/min. For higher speeds,
please contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
• Emergency stops from higher motor speeds are permitted.
6.1 Before startup

Prior to startup make sure that:
• The drive is undamaged and not blocked.
• Any transport locks have been removed.
• The measures stipulated in chapter "Preliminary work after longer periods of stor-
age" (→ 2 30) are performed after storage periods longer than 9 months.
• All connections have been made correctly.
• The direction of rotation of the motor/gearmotor is correct.
– Motor rotating clockwise: U, V, W (T1, T2, T3) to L1, L2, L3
• All protective covers are installed correctly.
• All motor protection equipment is active and set for the rated motor current.
• There are no other sources of danger.
• Loose elements like keys are appropriately secured.
• The brake is not manually released.
– The set screw of /HF option is loosened correctly.
– The hand lever of the /HR option has been removed and correctly attached to
the stator using the designated clamps.
6.2 Motors with reinforced bearing
NOTICE
Damage to bearings due to impermissible heating of bearing and motor.
Bearing damage.
• Do not operate cylindrical roller bearings without overhung load.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Startup
Motors with backstop /RS 6
6.3 Motors with backstop /RS
A /RS backstop is used to block/preclude a direction of rotation of the motor. The dir-
ection of rotation is indicated by an arrow on the fan guard of the motor or on the gear-
motor housing.
Observe the direction of rotation of the end shaft and the number of stages when you
mount the motor to the gear unit. Do not startup the motor in the blocking direction
(note the correct phase angle when connecting the motor). For inspection purposes,
you can operate the backstop once with half the motor voltage in the blocking direc-
tion.
If a conversion is required to change the blocking direction, follow the instructions in
chapter "Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop" (→ 2 177).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Inspection/maintenance
7
7 Inspection/maintenance
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the drive starts up unintentionally.
• Before you start working on the unit, disconnect the motor and all connected op-
tions from the power supply.
• Secure the motor against unintended power-up.
WARNING
Risk of crushing if the hoist falls or in the event of uncontrolled device behavior.
• Secure or lower the hoist drives.
• Secure and/or fence in the driven machine.
• Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid spare parts list.
• Always replace the brake coil together with the brake control.
safety note:
WARNING
ponents.
void.
CAUTION
Risk of burns.
24745332/EN – 08/2018
NOTICE
Damage to the oil seals if the temperatures is too low during installation.
Possible damage to the oil seals.
• Before assembly, make sure that ambient temperature and the temperature of
the oil seal are not below 0 °C.

7
INFORMATION
Apply grease with a grease depot to the lip of the oil seal before assembly. For fur-
ther information on lubricants, refer to chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-
corrosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 201).
INFORMATION
Friction disks at brakemotors may only be replaced by the SEW‑EURODRIVE ser-
vice.
Repairs Only SEW‑EURODRIVE repair workshops or plants that provide the necessary ex-
pertise may repair or modify the motor/brakemotor.
Before you take the motor back into operation, check to see if the regulations have
been adhered to. Confirm the check with a corresponding identification on the motor
or by issuing a test report:
Always perform safety and functional tests following all maintenance and repair work
(thermal protection).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7 Inspection and maintenance intervals
7.1 Inspection and maintenance intervals

The following table lists the inspection and maintenance intervals:
Device/part of Time interval What to do?

device
BE03 brake • If used as a working brake: Brake inspection
1)
At least every 3000 operating hours • Measure the working air gap
• If used as a holding brake: • Inspect the switch contacts and replace
them, if necessary (e.g. in case of burn-
Every 0.5 to 4 years, depending on
out)
operating conditions1)
BE05 – BE122 • If used as a working brake: Inspect the brake:
brake At least every 3000 operating hours 1)
• Measuring the brake disk thickness
• If used as a holding brake: • Brake disk, lining
Every 0.5 to 4 years, depending on • Measure and set working air gap
operating conditions1)
• Pressure plate
• Driver/gearing
• Pressure rings
• Suck off any abrasion
• Inspect the switch contacts and replace
them, if necessary (e.g. in case of burn-
out)
Motor • Every 10 000 operating hours2) 3) Motor inspection:
• Check rolling bearing and change if ne-
cessary
• Replace the oil seal
• Clean the cooling air ducts
Drive • May vary3) • Touch up or renew the surface/anti‑cor-
rosion coating.
• Check and clean the air filter.
• if applicable, clean condensation drain
hole at the bottom of the fan guard
• Clean clogged bores
Connection cables • Regularly Inspect cables
• Check for damages and replace the
connection cable if necessary.
1) Wear times are subject to many factors and can be quite short. The system manufacturer must calculate the required inspection/
maintenance intervals individually in accordance with the project planning documents.
2) For the DR../DRN225 – 315 motors with relubrication device, note the shortened relubrication periods in the chapter "Bearing lubric-
ation".
24745332/EN – 08/2018
3) The interval depends on outer influences and can be very short, e.g. in the event of high dust concentration in the environment.
If you open the motor during inspection/maintenance, you have to clean it before you
close it.

Bearing lubrication 7
7.2 Bearing lubrication
7.2.1 Bearing lubrication for DR..71 – 280, DRN63 – 280, DR2..63 – 80 motors

In standard design, the bearings are lubricated for life.
7.2.2 Bearing lubrication for DR..250 – 315, DRN225 – 315 motors with relubrication device /NS
Motors of nominal sizes 225, 250, 280, and 315 can be equipped with a relubrication
device. The following figure shows the positions of the lubrication devices.
375353099
[1] Relubrication device in type A according to DIN 71412
Under normal operating conditions and at an ambient temperature between -20 °C to

+40 °C, SEW‑EURODRIVE uses Mobil Polyrex EM (K2P-20 DIN 51825), a polyurea-
based mineral high-performance, high-temperature grease for initial lubrication.
For motors in the low temperature range up to -40 °C SEW-EURODRIVE uses SKF
GXN or LGHP2, which are also a polyurea-based mineral greases.
Relubrication
The grease can be purchased from SEW‑EURODRIVE in 400 g cartridges. For the
relevant order information, refer to chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-corro-
sion agents and sealants" (→ 2 201).
INFORMATION
Only mix lubricants of the same thickness type, the same base oil and the same con-
sistency (NLGI class)!
Grease the motor bearings in accordance with the information on the lubricant plate.
The used grease collects inside the motor and should be removed every 6 to 8 re-
lubrication cycles during an inspection. Each time you relubricate, ensure that the
bearing is two-thirds full.
24745332/EN – 08/2018
After relubricating the motors, you should start up slowly, if possible, so that the
grease is distributed evenly.

7 Reinforced bearings
Re-lubrication period
The table below lists the bearing relubrication intervals for the following conditions:
• Ambient temperature -20 °C to +40 °C
• Rated speed that corresponds to that of a 4-pole AC motor
• normal load
At greater speeds, higher loads or higher ambient temperatures, the re-lubrication in-
tervals are shorter. Use 1.5 times the quantity for the initial filling.
Motors with option Horizontal mounting Vertical mounting posi-

position tion
Duration Quantity Duration Quantity
DR../DRN225 – 315 /NS 5000 h 50 g 3000 h 70 g
DR../DRN225 – 315 /ERF /NS 3000 h 50 g 2000 h 70 g
7.3 Reinforced bearings

In the /ERF "reinforced bearings" option, cylindrical rolling bearings are installed on
the A-side.
NOTICE
Damage to bearings due to impermissible heating of bearing and motor.
Damage to property.
• Do not operate cylindrical roller bearings without overhung load.
The reinforced bearings are only offered with the /NS "relubrication" option so as to fa-
cilitate optimal lubrication of the bearing. Observe the notes on bearing lubrication in
chapter "Bearing lubrication for DR..250 – 315, DRN225 – 315 motors with relubrica-
tion device /NS" (→ 2 115).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work 7
7.4 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work
WARNING
7.4.1 Removing/installing the fan guard for DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors

The fan guard for DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors is attached using clips.
22845058443
Removing the fan guard

Proceed as follows to remove the fan guard:
1. Using a suitable tool, lever out at least 2 adjacent detents.
ð With EI.. encoder option: Lever out the detent pair opposite of the terminal
box.
2. Pull the detents over the latching cams of the endshield.
ð In case of DRN63, DR2..63, loosening all 4 fan guard connections may be re-
quired to remove the fan guard, depending on the option.
To request for a replacement in case the fan guard is damaged, contact
24745332/EN – 08/2018
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Reassembly
1. Evenly push the detents of the fan guard onto the latching cams until they snap in.

7 Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work
7.4.2 Removing/installing the plastic fan for DR..71, DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors
The plastic fan [2] for DR..71, DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors is attached using
clips.
[1]
[2]
23761871115
Removing the fan

Proceed as follows to remove the plastic fan:
ü Required tools: 1 puller.
1. Pull off the fan [2] from the shaft [1] using the puller.
ð The detent is pulled out of the latching groove.
2. Check that the detent of the fan is not damaged.
To request for a replacement in case the fan is damaged, contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
24745332/EN – 08/2018
23761866251

Reassembly
ü Required tools: 1 hammer, 1 hammer insertion tool.
1. Position the fan centrally on the shaft using the precentering.
2. Mount the fan to the shaft using the plain hammer insertion tool and the hammer.
The hammer insertion tool must not be placed on the detent but must have a lar-
ger diameter.
ð When the detent snaps into the latching groove, a click can be clearly heard.
3. Check if the detent is snapped into the latching groove.
23761868683
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.4.3 Removing rotary encoders from DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S motors

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the ES7. rotary en-
coder as an example:
[F]
[B]
[D]
[362] [A] [B] [G] [619]
[220]
[35]
[34] [361]
9007201837842187
[34] Tapping screw [A] Retaining screws for the torque

bracket
[35] Fan guard [B] Central retaining screw
[220] Encoder [D] Cone
[361] Safety cover [F] Bore
[362] Expansion anchor [G] Tooth lock washer
[619] Connection cover
Disassembling ES7./AS7.encoders
2. Loosen the screws of the connection cover [619] and remove it. Do not disconnect
the encoder cable.
3. Make sure the cone [D] doesn’t fall out while the central retaining screw [B] is
loosened. Loosen the central retaining screw [B] by 2 – 3 turns. Loosen the cone
[D] by tapping lightly onto the screw head.
4. To loosen the expansion anchor [362], remove the retaining screw of the torque
bracket [A]. Carefully pull the encoder [220] from the rotor bore.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Reassembly
1. Apply a contact corrosion prevention compound, e.g. NOCO® fluid to the encoder
pin.
2. Place the expansion anchor [362] at the torque bracket of the encoder.
3. Push the encoder into the bore in the shaft end to the stop.
4. Tighten the central retaining screw [B] with the inserted tooth lock washer [G].
ð Tightening torque 2.75 Nm.
5. Press the expansion anchor [362] into the fan guard [35] and check if it is seated
correctly.
6. Screw the retaining screws of the torque bracket [A] into the expansion anchor
[362] until the stop. Tighten the retaining screws of the torque bracket [A].
7. Screw on the connection cover [619].
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.4.4 Removing rotary encoders from DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280 motors

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. rotary en-
[715] [35] [1] [220] [232] [619] [706] [657] [707]
[361]
[B]
[34]
18014400901307275
[1] Rotor [B] Central retaining screw

[34] Tapping screw [619] Connection cover
[35] Fan guard [657] Canopy
[220] Encoder [706] Spacer bolt
[232] Screws [707]
Screws
[715]
[361] Safety cover [A] Screws
Removing EG7., AG7. encoders

1. Proceed as follows, depending on the design:
ð With canopy: Remove the screws [707] to disassemble the canopy [657]. If re-
quired, counter using a hexagon wrench SW13 on the spacer bolt [706].
ð Without canopy: Remove the screws [34] to disassemble the safety cover
[361].
2. Remove the forced cooling fan if required.
the encoder cable.
4. Remove the retaining screws of the torque bracket [232].
5. Loosen the central retaining screw [B] by 2 – 3 turns to pull off the encoder [220].
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Reassembly
pin.
4. Tighten the retaining screws of the torque bracket [232].
7. Mount the canopy [657] if necessary.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.4.5 Removing the rotary encoder from DR..160 – 225, DRN132M – 315 motors with /V forced
cooling fan option
The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EG7. rotary en-
[934]
[220]
[935]
[232]
[936]
[269]
[170]
[22]
[1]
9007206970702987
[22] Screw [935] Torque arm

[170] forced cooling fan guard [936] Screw
[232] Screws [934] Spacer bushing
[269] Grommet [220] Encoder
Removing EG7., AG7. encoders

1. Remove the screws [22] to disassemble the forced cooling fan [170].
2. Remove the cable grommet [269] with the encoder cable from the forced cooling
fan [170].
3. Remove the screws [232] and [936] to disassemble the torque bracket [935].
the encoder cable.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Reassembly
pin.
4. Place the torque bracket [935] onto the spacer bushing [934] and tighten the
screws [936].
5. Tighten the retaining screws of the torque bracket [232].
6. Insert the cable grommet [269] into the forced cooling fan [170].
7. Mount the forced cooling fan [170] and tighten the screws [22].
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.4.6 Removing rotary encoders from DR..315, DRN315 motors

The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using the EH7. and AH7.
rotary encoders as an example:
[734] [B] [220]
[35] [1] [659] [657]

EH7.
AH7.
[748] [B] [220]

18014398917111435
[35] Fan guard [659] Screw

[220] Encoder [734] Nut
[B] Central retaining screw [748] Screw
[657] Cover plate
Removing EH7., AH7. encoders

1. Remove the screws [659] to disassemble the cover plate [657].
2. Depending on the design, remove the encoder [220] from the fan guard [35] as fol-
lows:
ð EH7.: Remove the nut [734].
ð AH7.: Remove screw [748].
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Reassembly
ð EH7.: Tightening torque 3 Nm.
ð AH7.: Tightening torque 2 Nm.
3. Proceed as follows, depending on encoder:
ð EH7.: Install the nut [734].
ð AH7.: Insert and tighten screw [748].
4. Mount the cover plate [657] using the screws [659].
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.4.7 Mounting/removing rotary encoders with XV../EV../AV.. encoder mounting adapter to

DR..71 – 225, DRN71 – 225, DR2..71 – 80 motors
The following figure illustrates the disassembly procedure using a third-party encoder
as an example:
[212] [225] [220] [269] [22] [361] / [170]
[E] [D] [251] [232] [A] [B]
9007202887906699
[170] forced cooling fan guard [269] Grommet
[212] Fan guard with encoder mount [A] Adapter
[220] Encoder [B] Clamping screw
[225] Intermediate flange (not with XV1A) [D] Coupling (spread- or solid shaft coupling)
[232] Retaining screws (enclosed with [E] Clamping screw
XV1A and XV2A)
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed
with XV1A and XV2A)
Removing the XV.., EV.., AV.. encoders

2. Loosen the retaining screws [232] and turn the conical spring washers [251] out-
wards.
3. Loosen the clamping screw [E] of the coupling.
4. Remove adapter [A] and encoder [220].
Reassembly
24745332/EN – 08/2018
1. Proceed as described in chapter "Encoder mounting adapter" (→ 2 36) to mount

the encoder.

7.4.8 Mounting/removing rotary encoders with XV../EV../AV.. encoder mounting adapter for
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors
as an example:
[35]
[A]
[1458]
[233]
[225]
[226]
[220]
[251]
[232]
[269]
[361]
[22] [1496]
[1497]
[1498]
[1459] [1489]
[1460] [1461] [1462] [33]

[34]
18014406225445899
[33] Shim [1458] Screw
[34] Screw [1459] Cage nut
[35] Fan guard [1460] Serrated lock washer
[220] Encoder [1461] Shim
[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [1462] Screw
[226] Screw [1489] Ground strap
[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A [1496] Serrated lock washer
and .V2A)
[233] Coupling [1497] Shim
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed [1498] Screw
with .V1A and .V2A)
[269] Grommet [A] Encoder mounting adapter
Removing the encoder mounting adapter

1. Remove the screws [34] to disassemble the safety cover [361].
2. Remove the encoder [220], see chapter "Removing EV.., AV.. en-
coders" (→ 2 130).
3. In order to remove the ground strap [1489] from the encoder mounting adapter [A],
24745332/EN – 08/2018
loosen the serrated lock washer [1496], washer [1497], and screw [1498].
4. Remove the screws [22] to disassemble the fan guard [35].
5. Loosen the screw [1458] to remove the encoder mounting adapter [A].
ð If the encoder mounting adapter cannot easily be removed: Screw an M6
set screw (length 20 – 35 mm) hand tight in the rotor bore. Screw an M8 set
screw (length > 10 mm) into the same bore and push the encoder mounting ad-
apter [A] off the rotor [1]. Remove the M6 set screw from the rotor bore.

Removing EV.., AV.. encoders

1. Remove the screws [34] to disassemble the safety cover [361].
2. Pull out the cable grommet [269] together with the encoder cable from the safety
cover [361].
wards.
4. Loosen the screw at the coupling clamping hub [233] at the encoder end, the
screw can be accessed through the slots of the encoder mounting adapter [A].
5. Remove the encoder [220] from the encoder mounting adapter [A] or the interme-
diate flange [225].
Reassembly
the encoder.
INFORMATION
When re-installing the fan guard [35], make sure that the torque is supported:
The damping elements [1486] on both sides of the encoder mounting adapter [A]
must engage with the ventilation grid (see figure below). The torque plate [935] must
protrude from the grid to the left and to the right of the damping element.
[1486] [35] [935]
24745332/EN – 08/2018
9007207498780299

7.4.9 Mounting/removing the rotary encoder with EV../AV../XV.. encoder mounting adapter for
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors with /V forced cooling fan option
as an example:
[934]
[A]
[936]
[226]
[220]
[251]
[232]
[269]
[170]
[22]
[935]
[1463]
[1458]
[233]
[225]
7715965835
[22] Screw [269] Grommet
[170] Forced cooling fan guard [934] Spacer bushing
[220] Encoder [935] Torque arm
[225] Intermediate flange (optional) [936] Screw
[226] Screw [1458] Screw
[232] Screws (enclosed with .V1A [1463] Screw
and .V2A)
[233] Coupling [A] Encoder mounting adapter
[251] Conical spring washers (enclosed
with .V1A and .V2A)
Removing the encoder mounting adapter

fan [170].
wards.
diate flange [225].
24745332/EN – 08/2018
6. Loosen the screws [1458] and [936] to remove the encoder mounting adapter [A].
The torque brackets [935] and screws [1463] can remain at the encoder mounting
adapter [A].
ð If the encoder mounting adapter cannot easily be removed: Screw an M6
set screw (length 20 – 35 mm) hand tight in the rotor bore. Screw an M8 set
screw (length > 10 mm) into the same bore and push the encoder mounting ad-
apter [A] off the rotor [1]. Remove the M6 set screw from the rotor bore.

Removing EV.., AV.., and XV. encoders

fan [170].
wards.
diate flange [225].
Reassembly
the encoder.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.4.10 Mounting/removing hollow shaft encoders with XH.A encoder mounting adapter for
DR..71 – 225, DRN71 – 225, DR2..71 – 80 motors
as an example:
Encoder mounting with XH1A encoder mounting adapter Encoder mounting with XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapter
[269] [361] / [170]
[E] [F]
[35] [1] [D] [220] [B] [619] [C] [33] [34]

[35] [G] [1] [D] [220] [361] / [170]
9007202887902859
[1] Rotor [B] Central retaining screw
[33] Tapping screw [619] Connection cover
[34] Washer [C] Screw connection cover
[35] Fan guard [D] Torque bracket screws
[170] Forced cooling fan guard [E] Screw
[220] Encoder [F] Clamping ring
[269] Grommet [G] Nut of the torque bracket
[361] Safety cover
Removing hollow shaft encoders form XH1A encoder mounting adapter

the encoder cable.
3. Screw out the central retaining screw [B].
4. Remove the torque bracket screws [D].
5. Pull the torque bracket off.
6. Remove the encoder [220] from the shaft end.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Removing hollow shaft encoders from XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapter
2. Loosen the screw [E] from clamping ring [F].
3. Remove the torque bracket screws [D].
4. Remove the encoder [220] from the shaft end.
Reassembly of hollow shaft encoders to XH1A encoder mounting adapter

1. Push the encoder [220] on the shaft end.
2. Screw in the screw [D] to mount the torque bracket.
Reassembly of hollow shaft encoders to XH7A and XH8A encoder mounting adapter
1. Push the encoder [220] on the shaft end.
2. Screw in the screw [D] to mount the torque bracket.
3. Remove the screw [E] from clamping ring [F].
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Inspection/maintenance work for DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 motors 7
motors
For the position numbers used in the following descriptions, refer to chapter "Motor
structure" (→ 2 15).
7.5.1 Working steps for inspecting DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 motors

1. Disconnect the motor and all mounted options from the power supply before start-
ing to work, and secure the motor against unintentional power-up.
2. With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
Remove pinion and oil flinger [107].
3. Remove the forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed (see chapter "Pre-
liminary work for motor and brake maintenance" (→ 2 117)).
4. Remove fan guard [35] and fan [36].
5. Remove stator:
• DRN63, DR2..63 motors: Removing the cap screw [19].
• DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Remove cap screws [13]
from flanged endshield [7] and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] from
flanged endshield [7].
• DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 motors: Loosen hex head screw [19] and re-
move B-side endshield [42]. Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove stator
from flanged endshield.
• DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 motors
– Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with the
B-side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side
endshield [42].
• DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors without option /ERF or /NS
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7].
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the B-side endshield [42] together with
the rotor [1].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the B-side endshield [42] from the rotor
[1].
• DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors with option /ERF or /NS, or DR../
DRN315
– Loosen cap screws [19] and [25], and remove B-side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7] together with the rotor [1].
– Loosen hex head screws [609] and remove the flange [7] from the rotor [1].
24745332/EN – 08/2018
– Before disassembly, preferably protect the oil seal seat from damage using
adhesive tape or a protective sleeve.
6. Visual inspection: Is there any moisture or gear unit oil inside the stator?
• If not, proceed with step 9.
• If there is moisture, proceed with step 7.
• If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop

7 Inspection/maintenance work for DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 motors
7. If there is moisture inside the stator:

• With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
• With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange.
• Remove the rotor [1].
8. Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically, see chapter "Drying the mo-
tor" (→ 2 31).
9. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types, see
chapter "Permitted rolling bearings" (→ 2 198).
10. DR..250 – 280, DRN225 – 280 motors with option /ERF or /NS, or for DR../
DRN315
• Fill the rolling bearing with grease until it is two thirds full, see chapter "Bearing
lubrication" (→ 2 115)
• Notice: Place the oil seal flange [608] and [21] onto the rotor shaft before in-
stalling the bearings.
• Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.
• Place the springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the
flange [7].
• Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide it into the flange [7].
• Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head screws
[609].
11. Reseal the shaft:
• A-side: Replace the oil seal [106].
• B-side: Replace the oil seal [30].
Coat the sealing lip with grease (Klüber Petamo GHY 133).
12. Reseal the stator seat:
• Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing compound (operating temper-
ature -40 to +180 °C), such as "SEW L Spezial".
• DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Replace seal [392].
• DR..71 – 132, DRN63 – 132S, DR2..63 – 80 motors: Change O-ring [1480] if it
is deformed or damaged. As an alternative, use e.g. "SEW L Spezial" instead of
the O-ring.
• DRN63, DR2..63 motors: Change O-ring [392] if it is deformed or damaged. As
an alternative, use a duroplastic sealing compound, e.g. "SEW L Spezial" in-
stead of the O-ring.
13. Install the motor and options.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Inspection/maintenance work for DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 brakemotors 7
brakemotors
7.6.1 General structure of DR..71 – 80, DRN63 – 80, DR2..63 – 80 brakemotors
[35]
[22]
[32]
[51]
[64]
[53]
[19]
[550]
[901]
[42]
[62]
[70]
[1]
[46] [71]
[36]
[57]
[58]
[95]
DRN63, DR2..63
BE03
[390]
[900]
[550]
[901]
[42]
[392]
[13]
[51]
DR..71 [64]
DRN71, DR2..71 [95]
[157]
BE03 [550]
[392]
[13]
[58]
[57]
[56]
[53]
[59]
DR..80
DRN71-80, DR2..71 – 80
BE05-2
27021597938423947
[1] Motor [51] Hand lever (/HR) [70] Driver
[13] Cap screw [53] Releasing lever [71] Key
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[19] Screw [56] Stud [95] Sealing ring

[22] Hex head screw [57] Conical spring [157] Clamping strap (optional)
[32] Retaining ring [58] Hex nut [392] Gasket
[35] Fan guard [59] Parallel pin [550] Pre-assembled brake
[36] Fan wheel [62] Retaining ring [900] Screw
[42] Brake endshield [64] Set screw (/HF) [901] Flat gasket
[46] Clip

7 Inspection/maintenance work for DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 brakemotors
7.6.2 Basic structure of DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S brakemotors

[1] [46] [71] [42] [70] [157] [47] [95] [59] [53] [64] [51] [36] [32]
[56] [57] [58] [35] [22] [55]
[901] [62] [550] [900]
18014398689463947
[1] Motor [56] Stud [71] Key

[22] Hex head screw [57] Conical spring [95] Sealing ring
[32] Retaining ring [58] Hex nut [157] Clamping strap (optional)
[35] Fan guard [59] Parallel pin [550] Pre-assembled brake
[36] Fan wheel [62] Retaining ring [900] Screw
[42] Brake endshield [64] Set screw (/HF) [901] Seal
[46] Bracket [70] Driver
[47] O-ring
[51] Hand lever (/HR)
[53] Releasing lever
[55] Closing piece fan guard (DR..112 –
132, DRN112 – 132S)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.3 Basic structure of DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 brakemotors
[46] [42] [71] [901] [31] [53] [64] [51] [36] [32] [22] [35] [55]
[550] [900] [157] [95]
[57] [58]
[698] [47] [56]

BE11-62
[1] [390] [418] [70] [58]

[1453]
BE120/122
[57] [255] [256] [58]

18014399036705675
[1] Motor with brake endshield [53] Releasing lever [95] Sealing ring
[22] Hex head screw [55] Closing piece [157] Clamping strap (optional)
[31] Key [56] Stud [255] Conical seat
[32] Retaining ring [57] Conical spring [256] Spherical washer
[35] Fan guard [58] Hex nut [390] O-ring (DR..160 – 225, DRN132M –
225)
[36] Fan [58] Adjusting nut [418] Cable gland
[42] Brake endshield [62] Retaining ring [550] Pre-assembled brake
[46] Bracket [64] Set screw (/HF) [698] Connector complete (BE20-BE122)
[47] O-ring [70] Driver [900] Screw
[51] Hand lever [71] Key [901] O-ring/seal (DR..160 – 225, DRN132M
– 225)
[1453] Grommet (for DRN180 instead of [418])
[1607] O-ring (DR..250 –280/DRN250 – 280)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.4 Working steps for inspecting DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 brakemotors
2. With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit.
Remove pinion and oil flinger [107].
3. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed. See chapter "Motor
and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 117).
4. Remove the fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35] and the fan wheel
[36].
5. If applicable, disassemble the sensors of the /DUE option, see chapter "Removing
the /DUE diagnostic unit" (→ 2 167).
6. DR..90 – 315, DRN63– 315, DR2..63 – 80 motors: Remove the brake cpl. [550] (if
applicable) with mounted /HR, /HF option manual brake release.
• BE03 – 11: Remove terminal box cover, loosen brake cable and microswitch
supply cable of the /DUB option from the terminals.
• BE20 – 122: Loosen locking screws of the brake plug connector [698] and re-
move plug connector.
• BE03: Loosen screw [19] and carefully lift off brake [550].
• BE05 – 122: Loosen screws [900], press brake [550] off the endshield [42], and
carefully lift off the brake.
7. Remove stator:
• DR..71 – 132, DRN63 – 132S, DR2..63 – 80 motors: Remove cap screws [13]
from flanged endshield [7] and B-side endshield [42]. Remove stator [16] from
flanged endshield [7].
• DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 motors: Loosen hex head screw [19] and re-
move B-side endshield [42]. Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove stator
from flanged endshield.
• DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 motors
– Loosen hex head screw [15] and remove the flanged endshield [7] from the
stator.
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the complete rotor [1] together with the
B-side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the complete rotor [1] from the B-side
endshield [42].
• DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors without option /ERF or /NS
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7].
– Loosen cap screws [19] and remove the B-side endshield [42] together with
the rotor [1].
– Loosen cap screws [25] and remove the B-side endshield [42] from the rotor
[1].
24745332/EN – 08/2018
• DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors with option /ERF or /NS, or DR../
DRN315 motors
– Loosen cap screws [19] and [25], and remove B-side endshield [42].
– Loosen cap screws [15] and remove the flange [7] together with the rotor [1].
– Loosen hex head screws [609] and remove the flange [7] from the rotor [1].

– Before disassembly, preferably protect the oil seal seat from damage using
adhesive tape or a protective sleeve.
8. Pull the stator back by approx. 3 - 4 cm.
9. Visual inspection: Is there any moisture or gear unit oil inside the stator?
• If not, proceed with step 11.
• If there is moisture, proceed with step 10.
• If there is gear oil, have the motor repaired by a specialist workshop.
10. If there is moisture inside the stator:
• With gearmotors: Remove the motor from the gear unit
• With motors without a gear unit: Remove the A-flange
• Remove the rotor [1]
• Clean the winding, dry it and check it electrically, see chapter "Drying the mo-
tor" (→ 2 31).
11. - Remove the driver from the shaft.
12. Replace the rolling bearing [11], [44] with permitted rolling bearing types, see
chapter "Permitted rolling bearings" (→ 2 198).
13. Install key [71] and driver [70]:
• Preheat the driver to allow for easier installation (joining temperature +85 °C to
+115 °C).
• DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors: Clean the driver seat at the rotor [1] before
installation. Glue in the driver using Loctite 649. Join the retaining ring [62] flush
to the driver. Protect the sealing surface for the oil seal against scratches.
• DR..71 motors: Clean the driver seat at the rotor [1] before installation. Glue in
the driver using Loctite 648 or Loctite 649. Observe the correct fit to rolling
bearing [44].
• DR..80 – 315, DRN80 – 315, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Clean the driver at the ro-
tor [1] and coat with anti-corrosion agent NOCO® fluid before fitting. Then
mount retaining ring [62].
14. Seal the stator again and install it:
• DR..71 – 132, DRN63 – 132S, DR2..63 – 80 motors: Replace seal [392]
• DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 motors: Seal the sealing surfaces with duro-
plastic sealing compound (operating temperature -40 to +180 °C), such as
"SEW L-Spezial".
15. DR..250 – 280, DRN225 – 280 motors with option /ERF or /NS, or with DR../
DRN315 motors
• Fill the rolling bearing with grease until it is two-thirds full, see chapter "Bearing
lubrication" (→ 2 115).
• Notice: Place the oil seal flange [608], [21] onto the rotor shaft before installing
the bearings.
24745332/EN – 08/2018
• Starting on the A-side, mount the motor vertically.

• Place the springs [105] and lubrication ring [604] into the bearing bore of the
flange [7].
• Hang the rotor [1] onto the B-side thread, and guide it into the flange [7].
• Fasten the oil seal flange [608] to the flange [7] using the hex head screws
[609].

• Screw in the stator [16] and flange [7] with screws [15].
Notice: Protect the winding overhang from damage.
• Before mounting the B-side endshield, screw in the M8 set screw (approxim-
ately 200 mm) into the oil seal flange [21].
• Before mounting the B-side endshield [42], insert the set screw in through a
bore for the screw [25]. Screw B-side endshield to stator [16] using cap screws
[19] and hex nuts [17]. Lift the oil seal flange [21] with the set screw, and fasten
using 2 screws [25]. Remove the set screw and screw in the remaining screws
[25].
• Renew oil seals.
– A-side: Replace oil seals [106], for gearmotors replace the oil flinger [107]
and oil seal [250].
With gearmotors, fill about two-thirds of the space between the two oil seals
with suitable grease, see chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-cor-
rosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 201).
– B-side: Insert the oil seal [30], and coat the sealing lip with suitable grease.
16. Reseal the shaft:
• A-side: Replace the oil seal [106]
• B-side: Replace the oil seal [30]
Apply suitable grease to the sealing lip, see chapter "Order information for lub-
ricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 201).
17. Seal the friction disk of the brake [550] again at the brake endshield [42]:
• DRN63, DR2..63 motors: Replace O-ring [390] and flat gasket [901].
• DRN71, DR2..71 motors: Replace flat gasket [901] and seal [392].
• DR..71 – 132, DRN80 – 132S, DR2..80 motors: Replace seal [901]
• DR..160 – 280, DRN132M – 280 motors: Replace O-ring [901] or [1607].
• DR..315, DRN315 motors: Seal the sealing surface with duroplastic sealing
compound (operating temperature -40°C to +180°C), such as "SEW L Spezial".
18. Reinstall the brake [550]: Insert the brake cable into the terminal box when in-
stalling the brake. Install the brake. Observe the alignment of the brake. (Cams at
the endshield, manual brake release position).
• BE03 brake: The self-tapping screws must be distributed around the brake and
tightened evenly to avoid the brake from being tilted.
• DRN63, DR2..63/BE03 motors: Tighten screw [19] M5x35 (self-tapping) with a
tightening torque of 5 Nm. The screws can be re-used.
• DRN71, DR2..71/BE03 motors: Tighten screw [900] M5x20 (self-tapping) with
a tightening torque of 5 Nm. New screws must be used each time the brake is
mounted again.
• DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Install cap screws [13]. Tight-
ening torque: 5 Nm
24745332/EN – 08/2018
• DR..90 – 315, DRN90 – 315 motors: Install cap screws [900].
Motors DR..90 – 100, DR..112 – 160, DR..180, DR..200 – 225, DR..250 – 315,
DRN90 – 100 DRN112 – 132 DRN160 – 180 DRN200 – 225 DRN250 – 315
Tightening torque 10.3 Nm 25.5 Nm 50 Nm 87.3 Nm 230 Nm
19. Connect the brake connection cable.

• BE03 – 11: Reconnect the brake cable according to the wiring diagram.
• BE20 – 122: Plug in the brake plug connector [698] again. Tighten the retaining
screws again (tightening torque: 3 Nm)
20. Apply suitable grease to the sealing ring [95], see chapter "Order information for
lubricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealants" (→ 2 201).
21. If applicable: Install sensors of the /DUE option and recalibrate the zero value. See
chapter "Retrofitting the /DUE diagnostic unit for function and wear monitor-
ing" (→ 2 167).
22. Install the fan wheel [36] and the fan guard [35]. Install available optional equip-
ment.
23. With gearmotors: Replace oil flinger [107] and install the pinion.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.5 Basic structure of BE03 brakes

[54]
[718]
[49]
[68]
[73]
[47]
[56]
[50/276]
22473863947
[47] Sealing element [54] Magnet body, complete [73] Friction plate
[49] Pressure plate [56] Stud [276] Brake spring
[50] Brake spring [68] Brake disk (complete) [718] Damping plate
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.6 Basic structure of BE05 – 2 brakes
[42] [73] [67] [65] [718] [54] [60] [61]
[68] [49] [50]/[276] [66]
27021598292600715
[42] Brake endshield [61] Hex nut [73] Niro sheet metal
[49] Pressure plate [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [718] Damping plate
[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring
[60] Stud [68] Brake lining carrier
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.7 Basic structure of BE05 – 20 brakes

[702] [73] [67] [65] [718] [63] [54] [60] [61] [66]
[69] [68] [49] [50]/[276]/[1312]

36028797193166603
[49] Pressure plate [65] Pressure ring [276] Brake spring (blue)
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [702] Friction disk
[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Counter spring [718] Damping plate (BE05 – 11)
[60] Stud [68] Brake lining carrier [1312] Brake spring (white)
[61] Hex nut [69] Circular spring/clasp (BE5 – 20)
[63] Pole sheet [73] Niro sheet metal
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.8 Basic structure of BE30, 60, 120 brakes
[702] [69] [67] [68] [49] [54] [60] [28] [61]
[63] [50]/[276] [66]
18234907019
[28] Closing cap [61] Hex nut [69] Circular spring

[49] Pressure plate [63] Pole sheet [276] Brake spring (blue)
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [702] Friction disk
[54] Magnet body, complete [67] Setting sleeve
[60] Stud [68] Complete brake disk
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.9 Basic structure of BE32, 62, 122 brakes

[702] [67] [69b] [68b] [50] / [276] [60] [61]
[69a] [68a] [52] [49] [63] [54] [28] [66]
18234909451
[28] Closing cap [61] Hex nut [69a] Circular spring

[49] Pressure plate [63] Pole sheet [69b] Circular spring
[50] Brake spring (normal) [66] Sealing strip [276] Brake spring (blue)
[52] Brake plate complete [67] Setting sleeve [702] Friction disk
[54] Magnet body, complete [68a] Complete brake disk
[60] Stud [68b] Complete brake disk
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.10 Measuring the working air gap of BE03 brakes
The working air gap cannot be adjusted. The working air gap can only be measured
via the stroke of the pressure plate when the brake is released.
ü Disconnect the motor and all mounted options from the power supply before start-
1. Measure the working air gap X of the BE03 brake using a depth gauge or a slide
gauge at the stroke of the studs.
23652168459
ð The maximum permitted working air gap is 0.65 mm. Replace the brake in case
this value is exceeded.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.11 Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122 brakes

2. Remove the following:
• Forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor and
brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 117).
• Flange cover or fan guard [35]
3. Push the sealing strip [66] aside,
• Loosen the clamping strap [157] to do this, if necessary
• Suck off any abrasion
4. Measure the brake disk [68]:
• Minimum brake disk thickness, see chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 180).
• If necessary, replace brake disk according to chapter "Replacing the brake disk
of BE05 – BE122 brakes" (→ 2 152).
5. BE30 – 122: Loosen the setting sleeve [67] by turning it towards the B-side end-
shield.
6. Measure the working air gap A (see the following figure)
(use a feeler gauge and measure at three points offset by 120°):
• BE05 – 11: between pressure plate [49] and damping plate [718]
• BE20 – 122: between pressure plate [49] and magnet body [54]
1
12
0°
0°
12
3 2
120°
27021597944201611
24745332/EN – 08/2018
• BE05 – 20: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is set correctly,
see chapter "Braking work, working air gap, and brake lining carrier thick-
ness" (→ 2 183).

• BE30 – 122: Tighten the hex nuts [61] until the working air gap is 0.05 – 0.1mm
larger than the desired setting value (for default values, see chapter "Braking
work, working air gap, and brake lining carrier thickness" (→ 2 183)). For ex-
ample, with a desired air gap of 0.4 mm, the preset value must be 0.45 –
0.5 mm.
7. BE30 – 122: Evenly apply the setting sleeves [67] to the friction disk [900] by
screwing them out of the magnet body.
Tighten the hex nut [61] with the following tightening torque. Check the settings of
the working air gap and adjust it if necessary.
Brake Tightening torque

BE30 – BE32 93 Nm
BE60 – BE62 40 Nm
BE120 – BE122 230 Nm
8. If you are mounting the BE32, BE62, BE122 to a motor with vertical motor axis,
set the 3 springs of the brake plate [52] to the following dimension:
Brake Dimension X in mm
BE32 7.3
BE62 10.0
BE122 10.0
[49]
[68b]
[52]
X [68a]
[900] X
27021598220181131
9. Refit the sealing strip [66] and re-install the dismantled parts.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.12 Replacing the brake disk of BE05 – BE122 brakes

In addition to the brake elements listed in column "BE brake", see chapter "Inspection
and maintenance intervals" (→ 2 114), check the hex nuts [61] for wear when you re-
place the brake disk. You must always replace the hex nuts [61] when you replace the
brake disk.
INFORMATION
• With DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80 motors with BE05 – 2 brake, the brake cannot be
removed from the motor because the BE brake is directly installed on the brake
endshield of the motor.
• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32]/[62] and fan
[36]
3. Remove the brake cable
• BE05 – 11: Loosen the terminal box cover and unfasten the brake cable from
the rectifier.
4. Remove the rubber sealing collar [66]
5. Remove manual brake release if necessary.
• Adjusting nuts [58], conical springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], conical
seat [255], spherical washer [256]
6. Loosen the hex nuts [61], carefully pull off the magnet body [54] (brake cable!) and
take out the brake springs [50]/[276]/[1312].
7. BE05 – 11: Remove the damping plate [718], pressure plate [49] and brake disc
[68]
BE20, BE30, BE60, BE120: Remove the pressure plate [49], pole sheet [63] and
brake disk [68]
BE32, BE62, BE122: Remove the pressure plate [49], brake disk [68a] and [68b],
and the brake plate [52].
8. Clean the brake components.
9. Install new brake disk(s).
10. Brake parts are installed as described in chapter "Working steps for inspecting
DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 brakemotors" (→ 2 140).
• Except for the fan and the fan guard, because the working air gap has to be set
24745332/EN – 08/2018
first, see chapter "Setting the working air gap of BE05 – BE122
brakes" (→ 2 150).
11. In case of manual brake release: Use the adjusting nuts to adjust the floating
clearance "s" between the conical springs (pressed flat) and the adjusting nuts
(see chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release" (→ 2 161).

WARNING
No braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s".
• Make sure the floating clearance "s" is correctly set, so that the pressure plate
can move up as the brake lining wears.
12. Put the sealing strip [66] in place and re-install the dismantled parts.
INFORMATION
After replacing the brake disk, the maximum braking torque is reached only after sev-
eral cycles.
7.6.13 Changing the braking torque of BE05 – BE122 brakes

The braking torque can be altered in stages.
• By changing the type and number of brake springs
• By changing the complete magnet (only possible for BE05 and BE1)
• By changing the brake (from motor size 90)
• By changing to a double disk brake (only BE30, BE60, BE120)
For the possible braking torque steps, refer to chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 180).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.14 Changing the brake spring of BE05 – BE122 brakes

[36]
3. Remove the brake cable.
• BE05 – 11: Remove the terminal box cover. Remove the brake cable from the
rectifier.
• BE20 – 122: Loosen the locking screws of the brake plug connector [698]. Re-
move the plug connector.
4. Remove the sealing strip [66] and (if necessary) the manual brake release:
• Setting nuts [58], conical springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], conical
seat [255], spherical washer [256]
5. Unfasten the hex nuts [61] and pull off the magnet body [54]
• By approx. 50 mm (watch the brake cable!)
6. Replace or add brake springs [50/276/1312]
• Arrange brake springs symmetrically
brakes" (→ 2 150).
WARNING
INFORMATION
Replace the setting sleeves [58] if the removal procedure is repeated.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.15 Changing the magnet body of BE05 – BE122 brakes
[36]
3. Remove the rubber sealing collar [66] and the manual brake release:
• Setting nuts [58], conical coil springs [57], studs [56], releasing lever [53], paral-
lel pin [59].
4. Remove the brake cable
• BE05 – 11: Loosen the terminal box cover and unfasten the brake cable from
the rectifier.
5. Loosen hex nuts [61], remove complete magnet body [54], remove brake springs
[50]/[276]/[1312].
6. Install new magnet body with brake springs. For the possible braking torque steps,
refer to chapter "Technical data" (→ 2 180).
brakes" (→ 2 150).
WARNING
10. Replace the brake control in the event of an interturn short circuit or a short circuit
to frame.
INFORMATION
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Replace the setting sleeves [58] if the removal procedure is repeated.

7.6.16 Replacing BE03 brakes for DRN63 – 71 and DR2..63 – 71 motors

ü The motor and all connected options are disconnected from the power supply.
ü The motor is protected against unintended restart.
1. Removal
ð Forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor and
ð Fan guard with encoder mount [212] or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32]/[62]
and fan [36]
2. Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable from the brake control/
terminals. If necessary, attach trailing wire to brake cables.
3. Remove the screws and brake (with brake endshield if necessary) from the stator.
ð DRN63, DR2..63 motors: Screws [19]
ð DRN71, DR2..71 motors: Screws [900]
4. Replace seal [901]. Observe the alignment of the seal. .
5. If necessary, replace driver [70], key [71], and retaining ring [62], see chapter
"Working steps for inspecting DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 brakemo-
tors" (→ 2 140).
6. Insert the brake cable of the new brake into the terminal box.
7. Position the new brake. Make sure the cable outlet and brake disk gearing are cor-
rectly aligned.
8. Fasten the brake using screws [19] and [900]. Insert the screws around the brake
and tighten them in clockwise direction.
ð DRN63, DR2..63 motors: The screws [19] can be reused. Tightening torque
5 Nm, tolerance ±10%
ð DRN71, DR2..71 motors: Use new screws [900]. Tightening torque 5 Nm, toler-
ance ±10%
9. Seal the shaft.
10. Replace the sealing ring [95].
11. Apply grease to the sealing lip, see chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-
12. DANGER! No braking due to incorrectly set floating clearance "s". Severe or
fatal injuries. Make sure the floating clearance "s" is correctly set, so that the pres-
sure plate can move up as the brake lining wears.
Option manual brake release: Set floating clearance "s" using the adjusting nuts,
see chapter "Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release" (→ 2 161).
13. Install removed motor parts again.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.17 Replacing BE05 – 2 brakes for DR..71 – 80, DRN80, DR2..80 motors
1. Removal
and fan [36]
2. Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable from the brake control/
terminals. If necessary, attach trailing wire to brake cables.
ð DR..71 – 80, DRN80, DR2..80: Screws [13]
4. Replace seal [392]. Observe the alignment of the sealing.
tors" (→ 2 140).
6. Insert the brake cable of the new brake into the terminal box.
rectly aligned.
8. Fasten the brake again using the screws.
ð Cap screws [13]
ð Tolerance ±10%.
9. Seal the shaft.
12. For designs with corrosion protection /KS and/or IP56/66, the clamping straps of
the disassembled brake have to be mounted to the new brake [550]. Seal studs
with SEW-L-Spezial, see chapter "Order information for lubricants, anti-corrosion
agents and sealants" (→ 2 201).
14. Diagnostic unit option /DUE: Insert sensor [1151] into the magnet body [54] of the
new brake by using the screw fitting. Fasten the cable with terminal [1152/1153] at
the magnet body in a way that the sensor cable cannot touch the fan wheel [36].
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Then calibrate the zero value, see chapter "Calibrating the zero value" (→ 2 175).

7.6.18 Replacing BE05 – 62 brakes for DR..90 – 225, DRN90 – 225 motors

1. Removal
and fan [36]
2. Remove the brake cable.
ð BE05 – 11: Remove the terminal box cover and loosen the brake cable from
the brake control/terminals.
ð BE20 – 62: Loosen locking screws of the brake plug connector [698] and re-
4. Replace seal [901]. Observe the alignment of the seal. .
tors" (→ 2 140).
6. BE05 – 11: Insert the brake cable of the new brake into the terminal box.
rectly aligned.
ð BE20 – 62 with option manual brake release: Observe the correct position of
the manual brake release.
ð Cap screws [900]
ð Tightening torque for DR..90 – 100, DRN90 – 100: 10.3 Nm
ð Tightening torque for DR..180, DRN160 – 180: 50 Nm
ð Tolerance ±10%.
9. Seal the shaft.
12. BE20 – 62: Insert plug connector [698] in the brake and fasten using screws.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.19 Replacing BE60 – 122 brakes for DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 motors

1. Removal
and fan [36]
2. Screw out the locking screws of the brake plug connector [698] and remove the
plug connector.
ð DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 motors: Replace O-ring [1607].
tors" (→ 2 140).
5. Seal the shaft.
rectly aligned.
ð Manual brake release option: Observe the correct position of the manual brake
release.
ð Cap screws [900]
ð Tolerance ±10%.
11. Insert plug connector [698] in the brake and fasten using screws.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7.6.20 Retrofitting the /HR, /HF manual brake release
• Remove forced cooling fan and incremental encoder, if installed, see chapter
"Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 117).
• Fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35], retaining ring [32] and fan [36]
3. Installing manual brake release:
• BE03:
– Insert releasing lever [53] and spring plate [53] in the correct positions and
mount them to the magnet body.
– Mount the flange nut [58].
– Fasten hand lever [58]/set screw [64] between the stator fins using grommet
[46].
• BE05 – BE11:
– Remove old sealing ring [95].
– Screw in and glue studs [56], insert sealing ring for manual brake release
[95] and hammer in parallel pin [59].
– Mount releasing lever [53], conical coil springs [57] and setting nuts [58].
• BE20 – BE62:
– Place O-ring [47] into magnet body.
– Screw in and glue in stud [56].
– Mount releasing lever [53], conical coil springs [57] and setting nuts [58].
• BE120 – BE122:
– Place O-ring [47] into magnet body.
– Screw in and glue in stud [56].
– Mount releasing lever [53], conical springs [57], conical seat [255], spherical
washer [256], and adjusting nuts [58].
WARNING
4. Set floating clearance "s" using the adjusting nuts or flange nuts.
• BE03: Between releasing lever and flange nut (see following illustration).
• BE05 – 122: Between the conical spring (pressed flat) and adjusting nut (see
24745332/EN – 08/2018
following illustration).

BE03 BE05 – 122
Brake Floating clearance s

mm
BE03 2.2
BE05, BE1, BE2, 1.5
BE5 1.7
BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62, 2
BE120, BE122
5. Reinstall the removed parts.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB 7
7.7 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB
7.7.1 Basic structure of diagnostic unit /DUB on DR..90 – 315 motors with BE..
[379]
[378]
[112]
[66] [157] [49]
[1109]
[557]
[561] [562] [558]
[945] [556]
BE5-122
[555]
[946]
[560] [560] [559]
[561]
BE2
18014399594797835
[49] Pressure plate for DUB [555] Microswitch [561] Hex nut
[66] Sealing strip for DUB [556] Angle bracket [562] Shim
[112] Terminal box lower part [557] Bolt (BE5 and larger) [945] Hex head screw (BE2)
[157] Clamping strap (BE2 – 11) [558] Hex head screw [946] Mounting plate (BE2)
[378] Screw plug [559] Pan head screw [1109] Cable ties
[379] Screw fitting [560] Hex head screw
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB
7.7.2 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB
WARNING
INFORMATION
Brakes equipped with the /DUB option have at least one microswitch. These can be
used for function monitoring or setting a wear monitoring. If 2 microswitches are
mounted to one brake, both monitoring statuses can be realized. In this case, first set
the switch for wear monitoring, then the switch for function monitoring.
INFORMATION
The specifications provided in the tables on setting the wear monitoring refer to the
maximum permitted working air gap for brakemotors without safety options at brake
and encoder, see chapter "Braking work, working air gap, and brake lining carrier
thickness" (→ 2 183). Deviating values apply to brakemotors with the specified safety
options. Observe the information in the addendum to the operating instructions
"Safety Encoders and Safety Brakes – AC Motors DR.., DRN.., DR2.., EDR.., EDRN..
– Functional Safety".
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB 7
7.7.3 Inspection/maintenance work at the /DUB diagnostic unit with microswitch for function
monitoring
1. Check the working air gap according to chapter "Setting the working air gap of
BE05 – BE122 brakes" (→ 2 150) and adjust it if necessary.
2. Screw the hex head screw [560] against the actuator of the microswitch [555] until
it trips (brown, blue contacts closed).
While screwing, install hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the
thread.
3. Turn the hex head screw [560] back until the microswitch [555] switches back
(contacts brown-blue open). Depending on the brake size, screw out the hex head
screw [560] by the specified angle to set the switching hysteresis.
Brake Angle
BE2, BE5, BE11, BE20, BE30, BE60 60°
BE32, BE62 90°
BE120, BE122 105°
• After reaching the respective end position, tighten the hex nut [561] against the
bolts [557]/[945] while holding the hex head screw [560] to keep it in the correct
position.
• Switch the brake on and off several times. Check whether the microswitch opens
and closes reliably in any motor shaft position. Therefore, change the position of
the motor shaft manually several times. In case of incorrect switching, the setting
procedure may require to be repeated.
• Check if the cables are routed firmly and if they require additional fastening in form
of cable ties [1109]. Make sure the cables are routed in a sufficient distance to the
fan wheel of the motor.
• Install the previously removed motor parts again.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUB
7.7.4 Inspection/maintenance of the diagnostic unit /DUB with microswitch for wear monitoring
1. Check the working air gap according to chapter "Setting the working air gap of
BE05 – BE122 brakes" (→ 2 150) and adjust it if necessary.
2. Screw the hex head screw [560] against the actuator of the microswitch [555] until
it trips (brown, blue contacts closed).
While screwing, install hex nut [561] to eliminate the longitudinal play from the
thread.
3. Screw the hex head screw [560] further in from the actuated switching point, so
that the microswitch [555] remains activated (contact brown-blue closed). Depend-
ing on the brake size, screw the hex head screw [560] further in by the specified
angle to set the wear point:
Brake Standard brake With safety brake or

without safety encoder safety encoder
BE2 135° 135°
BE5 270° 180°
BE11, BE20, BE30, 360°
BE32, BE60, BE62
BE120 270° 135°
BE122 180° 90°
• After reaching the respective end position, tighten the hex nut [561] against the
bolts [557]/[945] while holding the hex head screw [560] to keep it in the correct
position.
• Check if the cables are routed firmly and if they require additional fastening in form
of cable ties [1109]. Make sure the cables are routed in a sufficient distance to the
fan wheel of the motor.
• Install the previously removed motor parts again.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE 7
7.8 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE
7.8.1 Basic structure of diagnostic unit /DUE
[1757] [378]
[1758] [379]
[112]
[1727]
[49] [718] [54] [1153] [1154] [1151]

18014412787670027
[49] Pressure plate for /DUE (BE20 and [1151] Distance sensor
higher)
[54] Magnet body complete for /DUE [1153] Spring (BE20 – 122)
[112] Terminal box lower part [1154] Mushroom head screw (BE20 – 122)
[378] Screw plug (DRN200 – 315) [1757] Evaluation unit
[379] Screw fitting (DRN200 – 315) [1758] Screw
[718] Dampening plate (BE1 – 11) [1727] Grommet (DRN80 – 180)
7.8.2 Removing the /DUE diagnostic unit

1. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed, see chapter "Motor and
2. Remove the fan guard [35] / fan guard with encoder mount [212], or the forced
cooling fan [170] by loosening the retaining screws [22].
3. If applicable: Remove the retaining ring [32] and the fan wheel [36] using a suitable
tool.
4. Loosen the screw [1154] for the cable fixture clamp [1153].
24745332/EN – 08/2018
5. Loosen the union nut of the sensor screw fitting. The sensor cable is free.
6. Loosen the sensor [1151] on the mounting flange. Remove the sensor.
7.8.3 Retrofitting the /DUE diagnostic unit for function and wear monitoring
For the component designation of the evaluation unit, refer to chapter "Designation of
the components" (→ 2 94).

7 Inspection/maintenance work diagnostic unit /DUE
Evaluation unit
The evaluation unit has a 5-pin DIP switch that is labeled with the numbers 1 to 5. Use
it to set the measuring range and the maximum permitted wear limit (maximum work-
ing air gap).
If the brake is used in combination with a safety encoder, or if the brake is designed as
safety brake, the setting values for the wear limit are reduced. For the new values,
refer to the addendum to the operating instructions for safety brakes and safety en-
coders.
To activate the DIP switch ≙1, push the switch upwards. To deactivate the DIP switch
≙ 0, push the switch downwards.
The following table shows the DIP switch settings of the evaluation unit for the maxi-
mum working air gap.
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Wear limit BE1 – 2 brake BE5 brake
Sensor Ø 6 mm
0 0 0 0 0 1.2 mm
0 0 0 0 1 1.1 mm
0 0 0 1 0 1.0 mm
0 0 0 1 1 0.9 mm X
0 0 1 0 0 0.8 mm
0 0 1 0 1 0.7 mm
0 0 1 1 0 0.6 mm X
0 0 1 1 1 0.5 mm
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 Wear limit BE11 – 122 brake

Sensor Ø 8 mm
1 0 0 0 0 1.2 mm X
1 0 0 0 1 1.1 mm
1 0 0 1 0 1.0 mm
1 0 0 1 1 0.9 mm
1 0 1 0 0 0.8 mm
1 0 1 0 1 0.7 mm
1 0 1 1 0 0.6 mm
1 0 1 1 1 0.5 mm
X Factory setting
Setting possible in addition
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Setting and mounting the evaluation unit
1. Set the wear limit using the DIP switches.
2. Screw the evaluation unit into the terminal box after consultation with
SEW‑EURODRIVE.
3. Connect the sensor, see chapter "Connecting the sensor" (→ 2 171).
4. Calibrate the infinite value, see chapter "Calibrating the infinite value" (→ 2 173).
5. Install the sensor in the brake, see chapter "Installing the sensor" (→ 2 174).
6. Route the cable, see chapter "Cable routing" (→ 2 175).
7. Calibrate the zero value, see chapter "Calibrating the zero value" (→ 2 175).
8. To check the function, measure the voltage via terminal 5k to 10k. Switch the
brake and check if 24 V are applied.
9. To check if the working air gap is within the permitted range, measure the current
between terminals 4k and 10k. Compare the value to the range in the diagram in
chapter "Output signals for function and wear monitoring" (→ 2 172).
Connecting electronics
The function and wear monitoring is connected according to the following wiring dia-
gram. The maximum permitted cable cross section at terminals "k" is 1.5 mm² with
conductor end sleeve without plastic collar, 0.75 mm² with plastic collar. The recom-
mended cable cross section at terminal "[k]" is 0.5 mm2 with conductor end sleeve with
plastic collar.
INFORMATION
Use shielded cables to wire the evaluation unit. Connect the shield to the GND poten-
tial, or use the shield plate at the user's signal evaluation.
• Unless they are shielded, sensor cables must always be routed separately from
other power cables with phased currents.
• Provide for a suitable equipotential bonding between drive and control cabinet.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

A C
4k
(BN) 4s
(BK) 5k
5s
(WH)
6s 6k
B
7k
8k
9k
10k
11k
18014412038672651
[A] Brake [4k] Analog output wear 1 (air gap)

[B] Eddy current sensor [5k] Digital output function 1 (NO contact)
[C] Evaluation unit [6k] Digital output wear 1 (NC contact)
[7k] Input calibration zero value
[4s] Connection sensor A1 (brown [8k] Input calibration infinite value
cable)
[5s] Connection sensor GND 1 (black [9k] Signal ground AGND
cable)
[6s] Connection sensor B1 (white cable) [10k] Ground potential GND
[11k] DC 24 V supply
The evaluation unit is supplied with DC 24 V via the terminals GND [10k] and DC 24 V
[11k].
Brake monitoring provides digital signals for:
• Function FCT1 [5k] and wear WEAR1 [6k] of the brake.
The working air gap can be monitored continuously via the analog signal (4 – 20 mA)
regarding the signal ground [9k]:
• Terminal OUT1 [4k]
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Use terminals ZERO [7k] and INF [8k] for calibration.
INFORMATION
If values deviate from the factory setting, the wear point setting must be adjusted.
See chapter "Evaluation unit" (→ 2 168).

Connecting the sensor
[1]
BN WH
BK
4s 5s6s 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 11k
DC 24V
WEAR1
AGND
ZERO
OUT1
FCT1
GND1
GND
A1
B1
INF
1
OFF
DUE-1K-00 21195609
9007214229800843
[1] Brake sensor
The connection cross section of the sensor is 0.14 mm². The litz wires of the sensor
cables must be equipped with conductor end sleeves. The cable shield must be isol-
ated against other potentials using a heat shrink tubing. The litz wires can be pushed
into the terminals without using tools. Put the sensor cables in the provided line clip,
see figure in chapter "Calibrating the infinite value" (→ 2 173). To remove the sensor
cables, use an insulated screwdriver to disengage the clips.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Output signals for function and wear monitoring

The diagnostic unit /DUE provides an analog signal (4 – 20 mA, DIN IEC 60381‑1) for
the current working air gap of the brake.
D6 D8
IOut [mA] IOut [mA]
20 20
13,6 13,6
10 10
[5] [4] [3] [5] [4] [3]

4 4
x [mm] x [mm]
0 x 0,9 1,5 0 x 1,2 2,0
U [V] U [V]
[1] [1]
24 24
FCT FCT
0 0
U [V] U [V]
[2] [2]
24 24
WEAR WEAR
0 0
14668091147 15221727499
[1] FCT: Digital output function (DC 24 V, DIN EN 61131-2)

[2] WEAR: Digital output wear (DC 24 V, DIN EN 61131-2)
[3] Measuring range of the sensor
[4] Max. working air gap of the brake (exemplary)
[5] Currently measured working air gap (exemplary)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Calibrating the infinite value
Before you can install the sensor in the brake, the electronics must be calibrated to the
actual cable length. During calibration of the infinite value, electronics is adjusted to
the sensor cable length. Electronics is reset and previous settings are overwritten.
The sensor must be removed from the brake for the following steps.
Procedure to calibrate the infinite value for the sensor:
1. Make sure that no metallic objects are within a 10 cm radius from the sensor head.
The mounting springs may be in contact with the back of the sensor head during
calibration.
2. Connect the supply voltage to INF (8k) and AGND (9k) for approx. 5 s. You can
use GND (10k) as reference potential instead of AGND (9k). The evaluation unit is
supplied via the calibration input during calibration.
The analog output OUT1 signals 0 mA during the calibration procedure.
The infinite value was successfully calibrated when OUT1 (4k) displays 20 mA. The
red LED briefly flashes once per second as visual signal.
The corresponding wiring diagram for the calibration process.
+24 V GND
4s 5s6s 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 11k
DC 24V
WEAR1
AGND
ZERO
OUT1
FCT1
GND1
GND
A1
B1
INF
1
OFF
DUE-1K-00 21195609
14975067787
During calibration, the digital outputs WEAR1 (6k), FCT1 (5k) send a 0 signal which
may lead to error messages (wear limit reached).
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Installing the sensor

After calibration, the eddy current sensor can be installed in the magnet body of the
brake. When installing the sensor, make sure that the sensor head can be inserted in
the stepped bore without pressure being applied.
First install the lower part of the cable gland. Then mount the upper part of the cable
gland.
INFORMATION
To ensure that the sensor is correctly inserted in the stepped bore, twist the sensor
carefully with the cable before screwing in the cable gland. Protect the sensor cable
against damage.
[1]
15126940043
[1] Brake sensor
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Cable routing
Prevent the cable from colliding with the fan cable. If necessary, attach the cable to
the included clamping strap [157] on the brake using cable ties.
Calibrating the zero value

During calibration of the zero value, the current working air gap with released (open)
brake is written in the evaluation unit. The electronics is reset and previous settings
are overwritten. You can save the zero value at any time without changing the infinite
value.
Procedure during calibration of the zero value:
1. Open the brake.
2. Apply the supply voltage to ZERO (7k) and AGND (9k) for approx. 3 seconds.
Electronics is in calibration mode. You can use GND (10k) as reference potential
instead of AGND (9k). The evaluation unit is supplied via the calibration input dur-
ing calibration.
The evaluation unit saves the smallest working air gap of the brake. Each write pro-
cess is indicated by a brief flashing of the red LED.
The activated calibration mode is indicated by the following LED state:
LED State
Green [6] Off
Red [6] Flashing (2 Hz)
+24 V GND
4s 5s6s 4k 5k 6k 7k 8k 9k 10k 11k

DC 24V
WEAR1
AGND
ZERO
OUT1
FCT1
GND1
GND
A1
B1
INF
1
OFF
DUE-1K-00 21195609
14977696651
During calibration, the digital outputs WEAR1 (6k), FCT1 (5k) send a 0 signal which
may lead to error messages (wear limit reached).
The analog output OUT1 (4k) signals 0 mA during the calibration procedure. After suc-
24745332/EN – 08/2018
cessful calibration, the value is saved. The output has 4 mA with released brake. If a
smaller value is available within 3 seconds, the last value is deleted and the new value
is saved. The 4 mA at the output remain unchanged.

Status messages of the evaluation unit

Brake Sensor Calibration LEDs and outputs
State
ZERO INF Green Red FCT WEAR OUT
Open Installed – – To Off HI HI 3.6 – Brake open, no wear
5.6 mA
Go to Installed – – Off Off LO HI 6 – 20 mA Brake closed, no wear
Go to Installed – – Off To LO LO 6 – 20 mA Brake closed, set wear limit of
brake reached
– – – – Off To LO LO >20 mA Measuring range exceeded or
sensor not connected correctly
– Not in- – HI Off Blinking LO LO 0 mA Infinite value calibration active
stalled 1 Hz
– Not in- – HI Off Flashing LO LO 20 mA Infinite calibration successful
stalled 1 Hz
– – – – Blinking Blinking Clock Clock 1 Hz 0 mA Not completely calibrated:
1 Hz 1 Hz 1 Hz • ZERO calibration missing
• Delivery state (both calibra-
tions missing)
Open Installed HI – Off Blinking LO LO 0 mA Zero value calibration active
2 Hz
Open Installed HI – Off Blinking LO LO 4 mA First zero value calibration suc-
2 Hz cessful
Open Installed HI – Off Flicker- LO LO 4 mA Smaller zero value detected and
ing saved
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop 7
7.9 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop
7.9.1 Basic structure of DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors with backstop

[71] [1] [44] [392] [42] [48] [74] [75] [77] [36] [35] [78]
[41] [62] [37] [32]
18014399652340235
[1] Motor with brakemotor [48] Spacing ring (only DR../DRN/DR2..80)
[32] Retaining ring [62] Retaining ring (only DR../DRN/
DR2..80)
[35] Fan guard [71] Key
[36] Fan wheel [74] Backstop
[37] Sealing ring [75] Sealing flange
[41] Equalizing ring [77] Cap screw
[42] Backstop endshield, complete [78] Direction of rotation information sign
[44] Deep groove ball bearing [392] Gasket
24745332/EN – 08/2018

7 Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop
7.9.2 Basic structure of DR..90 – 315, DRN63, 90 – 315, DR2..63 motors with backstop
[1] [392] [42] [71] [30] [48] [74] [62] [703] [37] [32] [78] [55]
[901] [376] [1406] [702] [36] [35]

[390] [1607]
18014399652338315
[1] Motor [74] Backstop
[30] Sealing ring (DR../DRN250-315) [78] Information sign for direction of rotation
[32] Retaining ring
[35] Fan guard [702] Backstop housing
[36] Fan wheel [703] Cap screw
[37] Sealing ring [376] Screw plug (DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315)
[42] Brake endshield [392] O-ring (with DRN63, DR..63)
Seal (DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S)
[48] Spacing ring [901] Seal (DR..90 – 225, DRN90 – 225)
[55] Closing piece (from DR../ [1406] Spacing ring (DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315)
DRN112)
[62] Retaining ring (from DR../DRN90) [1607] O-ring (DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280)
[71] Key
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Altering the blocking direction on motors with a backstop 7
7.9.3 Changing the blocking direction
Proceed as follows to change the blocking direction:
2. Remove forced cooling fan and rotary encoder, if installed.
See chapter "Motor and brake maintenance – preliminary work" (→ 2 117).
3. Remove fan guard with encoder mount or fan guard [35].
4. DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Remove the sealing flange [75].
DR..90 – 315, DRN63, 90 – 315, DR2..63 motors: Completely remove the back-
stop housing [702].
5. Loosen retaining ring [62] and spacer [1406] (if necessary).
6. Remove the sprag ring [74] via screws in the forcing threads or using a puller.
7. Spacing ring [48], if provided, remains installed.
8. Turn around wedge element ring [74], check the old grease and replace according
to the specifications below and reinstall the wedge element ring.
DRN63 – 71, DR2..63 – 71 motors: Glue in sprag ring [74] with Loctite 648/649.
9. Install retaining ring [62].
10. DR..71 – 80, DRN71 – 80, DR2..71 – 80 motors: Apply SEW-L-Spezial to the
sealing flange [75] and install it. Replace sealing ring [37] if necessary.
DR..90 – 315, DRN63, 90 – 315, DR2..63 motors: Replace seal [901] and [1607].
Also replace seal [37] if necessary. Completely install the backstop housing [702].
11. Reinstall the removed parts.
12. Replace the label [78] indicating the direction of rotation.
Lubricating the backstop

The backstop is greased at the factory with the corrosion protection low-viscosity
grease LBZ 1. If you want to use another grease, make sure it complies with NLGI
class 00/000 with a base oil viscosity of 42 mm2/s at 40 °C on a lithium saponified and
mineral oil base. The application temperature range is from -50 °C to +90 °C. See the
following table for the amount of grease required:
DR.. motors 71 80 90/100 112/132 160 180 200/225 250/280 315

DRN.. motors 63/71 80 90/100 112/132S 132M/L 160/180 200/225 250/280 315
DR2.. motors 63/71 80 – – – – – – –
Amount of grease 9 11 15 20 30 45 80 80 120
in g
The tolerance regarding the grease level is ± 30%.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Braking torques
8 Technical data
8.1 Braking torques

Table shows the possible braking torque combinations for various sizes of the BE..
brake. .
WARNING
Insufficient or too high braking torque due to impermissible spring pack.
• Maintenance work may only be performed by a trained specialists.
• In case of a conversion, make sure the selected spring set generates nominal
braking torques that are permitted for your drive combination and suitable for the
application.
• Observe the project planning note in the manual "Project Planning for BE..
Brakes – DR.., DRN..,, DR2.., EDR.., EDRN.. AC Motors – Standard Brake/
Safety Brake", or contact SEW‑EURODRIVE.
Brake Part number Braking torque settings

Damping plate Braking torque Type and number of brake springs Purchase order numbers for
[718] brake springs
Pole sheet [63]
Nm Normal [50] Blue [276] White [1312] Normal Blue/white
BE031) 21141525 3.4 6 – – 01858157 13750798
2.7 4 2 –
2.1 4 – –
1.7 3 – –
1.3 – 4 –
0.9 – 3 –
BE05 13740563 5.0 3 – – 0135017X 13741373
3.5 – 6 –
2.5 – 4 –
1.8 – 3 –
BE1 13740563 10 6 – – 0135017X 13741373
137498622) 7.0 4 2 –
5.0 3 – –
BE2 13740199 20 6 – – 13740245 13740520
137498702) 14 2 4 –
10 2 2 –
7.0 – 4 –
5.0 – 3 –
BE5 13740695 55 6 – – 13740709 13740717
137498892) 40 2 4 –
28 2 2 –
20 – – 6 13747738
14 – – 4
24745332/EN – 08/2018
BE11 13741713 110 6 – – 13741837 13741845

137498542) 80 2 4 –
55 2 2 –
40 – 4 –
13741713 + 28 – 3 –
13746995
137498542) + 20 – – 4 13747789
13746995

Technical data
Braking torques 8
Brake Part number Braking torque settings
Damping plate Braking torque Type and number of brake springs Purchase order numbers for
[718] brake springs
Pole sheet [63]
Nm Normal [50] Blue [276] White [1312] Normal Blue/white
BE20 – 200 6 – – 13743228 13742485
– 150 4 2 –
– 110 3 3 –
– 80 3 – –
13749307 55 – 4 –
13746758 40 – 3 –
BE30 – 300 8 – – 01874551 13744356
– 200 4 4 –
– 150 4 – –
– 100 – 8 –
13749455 75 – 6 –
BE32 – 600 8 – – 01874551 13744356
– 500 6 2 –
– 400 4 4 –
– 300 4 – –
– 200 – 8 –
13749455 150 – 6 –
13749455 100 – 4 –
BE60 – 600 8 – – 01868381 13745204
– 500 6 2 –
– 400 4 4 –
– 300 4 – –
– 200 – 8 –
BE62 – 1200 8 – – 01868381 13745204
– 1000 6 2 –
– 800 4 4 –
– 600 4 – –
– 400 – 8 –
BE120 – 1000 8 – – 13608770 13608312
– 800 6 2 –
– 600 4 4 –
– 400 4 – –
BE122 – 2000 8 – – 13608770 13608312
– 1600 6 2 –
– 1200 4 4 –
– 800 4 – –
1) BE03 brake is maintenance-free. Only SEW-EURODRIVE may change the spring pack.
2) For option /DUE
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Braking torques
8.1.1 Brake spring layout

The following table shows the brake spring layout:
BE03 – 11:
6 springs 3 + 3 springs 4 + 2 springs 2 + 2 springs 4 springs 3 springs
BE20:
6 springs 4 + 2 springs 3 + 3 springs 4 springs 3 springs
BE30 – 122:
8 springs 4 + 4 springs 6 + 2 springs 6 springs 4 springs
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Braking work, working air gap, and brake lining carrier thickness 8
8.2 Braking work, working air gap, and brake lining carrier thickness
If the brake is used in combination with a safety encoder, or if the brake is designed as
safety brake, the maximum values for the working air gap and for the braking work un-
til maintenance are reduced. For the new values, refer to the addendum to the operat-
ing instructions for safety brakes and safety encoders.
Brake Braking work until Working air gap Brake lining car-
maintenance1) rier
min.2) max. Min.
106 J mm mm mm
BE03 200 0.25 0.65 –3)
BE05 120 0.25 0.6 11.0
BE1 120 0.25 0.6 11.0
BE2 180 0.25 0.6 11.0
BE5 390 0.25 0.9 11.0
BE11 640 0.3 1.2 12.5
BE20 1000 0.3 1.2 12.5
BE30 1500 0.3 1.2 12.5
BE32 1500 0.4 1.2 12.5
BE60 2500 0.3 1.2 14.0
BE62 2500 0.4 1.2 14.0
BE120 390 0.6 1.2 14.0
BE122 300 0.8 1.2 14.0
1) The specified values are nominal values that were determined during rating operation. The actual braking work that can be reached
before maintenance may vary depending on the actual load during operation.
2) When checking the working air gap, note: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rise to deviations of ±0.15 mm after a
test run.
3) The brake lining carrier of the BE03 cannot be replaced. Replace the brake when the maximum working air gap is reached.
INFORMATION
In case of drives with BE32, BE62, or BE122 brake in pivoted mounting position, the
specified value may be reduced by up to 50%, depending on the pivoting angle.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Operating currents
8.3 Operating currents

8.3.1 General information on determining operating currents
The tables in this chapter list the operating currents of BE.. brakes at different
voltages.
The acceleration current IB (= inrush current) flows only for a short time (approx.
160 ms for BE03 – BE62, 400 ms for BE60 – BE122 with BMP3.1 brake control) when
the brake is released. No increased inrush current occurs when using BG.., BS24 or
BMS.. brake control and direct DC voltage supply without control unit (only possible
with brake size BE03 – BE2).
The values for the holding currents IH are rms values. Only use current measurement
units that are designed to measure rms values.
INFORMATION
The following operating currents and power consumption values are nominal values.
They refer to a coil temperature of +20 °C.
Operating currents and power consumption usually decrease during normal operation
due to heating of the brake coil.
Note that the actual operating currents can be higher by up to 25% depending on the
ambient temperature and with coil temperatures below +20 °C.
8.3.2 Legend
The following tables list the operating currents of the brakes at different voltages.
The following values are specified:
PB Electric power consumption in the brake coil in watt.

VN Nominal voltage (nominal voltage range) of the brake in V (AC or DC).
IH Holding current in ampere r.m.s. value of the brake current in the supply cable
to the SEW brake control.
IDC Direct current in ampere in the brake cable with direct DC voltage supply
or
Direct current in ampere in the brake cable with DC 24 V supply via BS24,
BSG, or BMV.
IB Acceleration current in ampere (AC or DC) when operated with SEW brake
control for high-speed excitation.
IB/IH Inrush current ratio ESV.
IB/IDC Inrush current ratio ESV for DC 24 V supply with BSG or BMV.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Operating currents 8
8.3.3 BE03, BE05, BE1, BE2 brakes
BE03 BE05, BE1 BE2

Rated brake coil power in W 25 32 43
Inrush current ratio ESV 4 4 4
Nominal voltage VN BE03 BE05, BE1 BE2

IH IDC IH IDC IH IDC
AC V DC V AC A DC A AC A DC A AC A DC A
24 (23-26) 10 2.20 2.55 2.25 2.90 2.95 3.80
60 (57-63) 24 0.87 1.02 0.90 1.17 1.18 1.53
120 (111-123) 48 0.44 0.51 0.45 0.59 0.59 0.77
184 (174-193) 80 0.28 0.32 0.29 0.37 0.38 0.49
208 (194-217) 90 0.25 0.29 0.26 0.33 0.34 0.43
230 (218-243) 96 0.22 0.26 0.23 0.30 0.30 0.39
254 (244-273) 110 0.19 0.23 0.20 0.27 0.27 0.35
290 (274-306) 125 0.17 0.21 0.18 0.24 0.24 0.31
330 (307-343) 140 0.15 0.18 0.16 0.21 0.21 0.28
360 (344-379) 160 0.14 0.16 0.14 0.19 0.19 0.25
400 (380-431) 180 0.12 0.14 0.13 0.17 0.17 0.22
460 (432-484) 200 0.11 0.13 0.11 0.15 0.15 0.19
500 (485-542) 220 0.10 0.11 0.10 0.13 0.14 0.18
575 (543-600) 250 0.09 0.10 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.16
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Operating currents
8.3.4 Brakes BE5, BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62
BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62

Rated brake coil power in W 49 77 95 120 195
Inrush current ratio ESV 5.9 6.6 7.5 8.5 9.2
Nominal voltage VN BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62

IH IH IH IH IH
AC V DC V AC A AC A AC A AC A AC A
60 (57-63) 24 1.28 2.05 2.55 – –
120 (111-123) – 0.64 1.04 1.28 1.66 –
184 (174-193) – 0.41 0.66 0.81 1.05 –
208 (194-217) – 0.37 0.59 0.72 0.94 1.50
230 (218-243) – 0.33 0.52 0.65 0.84 1.35
254 (244-273) – 0.29 0.47 0.58 0.75 1.20
290 (274-306) – 0.26 0.42 0.51 0.67 1.12
330 (307-343) – 0.23 0.37 0.46 0.59 0.97
360 (344-379) – 0.21 0.33 0.41 0.53 0.86
400 (380-431) – 0.18 0.30 0.37 0.47 0.77
460 (432-484) – 0.16 0.27 0.33 0.42 0.68
500 (485-542) – 0.15 0.24 0.29 0.38 0.60
575 (543-600) – 0.13 0.22 0.26 0.34 0.54
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Operating currents 8
8.3.5 Brake BE120, BE122
BE120, BE122
Rated brake coil power in W 220
Inrush current ratio ESV 6
Nominal voltage VN BE120, BE122

IH
AC V AC A
230 (218-243) 1.45
254 (244-273) 1.30
290 (274-306) 1.16
360 (344-379) 0.92
400 (380-431) 0.82
460 (432-484) 0.73
500 (485-542) 0.65
575 (543-600) 0.58
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Resistors
8.4 Resistors
The depicted values apply to the standard temperature range of -20 to +40 °C. Deviat-
ing resistances may occur in other temperature ranges, especially in case of drives
with permitted temperature above +60 °C, or in case of non-ventilated drives, due to
modified winding configurations. The values are available from SEW‑EURODRIVE on
request.
8.4.1 Resistance measurement BE03, BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62
Cut-off in the AC circuit

The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cut-off in the AC cir-
cuit.
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
BU
RD
WH
9007199497350795
Cut-off in the DC and AC circuits

The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with cut-off in the DC and
AC circuits.
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
BU
RD
WH
18014398752093451
BS Accelerator coil RD Red

TS Coil section WH White
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20 °C in Ω BU Blue
RT Coil section resistance at 20 °C in Ω
VN Nominal voltage (rated voltage range)
24745332/EN – 08/2018
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil
(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,
the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.

Technical data
Resistors 8
8.4.2 BE03, BE05, BE1, BE2, BE5 brakes
BE03 BE05, BE1 BE2

Rated brake coil power in W 25 32 43
Inrush current ratio ESV 4 4 4
Nominal voltage VN BE03 BE05, BE1 BE2

AC V DC V RB RT RB RT RB RT
60 (57–63) 24 6 18.7 4.85 14.8 3.60 11.0
120 (111–123) 48 24 74 19.4 59.0 14.4 44.0
184 (174–193) 80 61 187 48.5 148 36.0 110
208 (194–217) 90 76 235 61.0 187 45.5 139
230 (218–243) 96 96 295 77.0 235 58.0 174
254 (244–273) 110 121 375 97.0 296 72.0 220
290 (274–306) 125 152 470 122 372 91 275
330 (307–343) 140 192 590 154 469 115 350
360 (344–379) 160 240 740 194 590 144 440
400 (380–431) 180 305 940 244 743 182 550
460 (432–484) 200 380 1180 308 935 230 690
500 (485–542) 220 480 1480 387 1178 290 870
575 (543–600) 250 610 1870 488 1483 365 1100
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Resistors
8.4.3 Brakes BE11, BE20, BE30, BE32, BE60, BE62
BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62

Rated brake coil 49 77 95 120 195
power in W
Inrush current ratio 5.9 6.6 7.5 8.5 9.2
ESV
Nominal voltage BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE32 BE60, BE62

VN
AC V RB RT RB RT RB RT RB RT RB RT
60 (57–63) 2.20 10.5 1.22 7.0 0.9 5.7 – – – –
120 (111–123) 8.70 42.0 4.90 28.0 3.4 22.8 2.3 17.2 – –
184 (174–193) 22.0 105 12.3 70 8.5 57.2 5.8 43.2 – –
208 (194–217) 27.5 132 15.5 88 10.7 72.0 7.3 54.4 4.0 32.6
230 (218–243) 34.5 166 19.5 111 13.5 90.6 9.2 68.5 5.0 41.0
254 (244–273) 43.5 210 24.5 139 17.0 114.1 11.6 86.2 6.3 51.6
290 (274–306) 55.0 265 31.0 175 21.4 143.6 14.6 108.6 7.9 65.0
330 (307–343) 69.0 330 39.0 220 26.9 180.8 18.4 136.7 10.0 81.8
360 (344–379) 87.0 420 49 280 33.2 223 23.1 172.1 12.6 103
400 (380–431) 110 530 62 350 42.7 287 29.1 216.6 15.8 130
460 (432–484) 138 660 78 440 53.2 357 35.1 261.8 19.9 163
500 (485–542) 174 830 98 550 67.7 454 45.2 336.4 25.1 205
575 (543–600) 220 1050 123 700 83.5 559 56.3 419.2 31.6 259
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Resistors 8
8.4.4 Resistance measurement BE120, BE122
The following illustration shows how to measure resistance with BMP 3.1.
RD
RB
WH
RT
BU
RD WH BU
BS Accelerator coil RD Red

TS Coil section WH White
RB Accelerator coil resistance at 20°C in Ω BU Blue
RT Coil section resistance at 20 °C in Ω
VN Nominal voltage (rated voltage range)
INFORMATION
When measuring the resistance of the coil section (RSec) or the acceleration coil
(RAcc), remove the white conductor from the brake rectifier; if it remains connected,
the internal resistance of the brake rectifier will cause erroneous results.
8.4.5 Brake BE120, BE122
BE120, BE122
Rated brake coil power in W 220
Inrush current ratio ESV 6
Nominal voltage VN BE120, BE122

AC V RB RT
230 (218-243) 7.6 37.9
254 (244-273) 9.6 47.7
290 (274-306) 12.1 60.1
360 (344-379) 19.2 95.2
400 (380-431) 24.2 119.9
24745332/EN – 08/2018
460 (432-484) 30.4 150.9

500 (485-542) 38.3 189.9
575 (543-600) 48.2 239.1

Technical data
8 Brake control
8.5 Brake control

The depicted combinations apply to drives in insulation class B or F, and to the stand-
ard temperature range of -20 °C to +40 °C.
For the brake control assigned to your drive, refer to the specifications on the motor
nameplate.
INFORMATION
The depicted combinations may be limited depending in the present drive configura-
tion (e.g. insulation class H, deviating temperature ranges, etc.). In case of a conver-
sion, check if brake control is permitted for your drive combination. Contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE if necessary.
8.5.1 Permitted combinations

The table below shows the standard and optional combinations of brakes and brake
rectifiers.
BE03 BE03 BE05 BE1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE60, BE120,
with BE32 BE62 BE122
DRN63
BG.. Size 1.2 X − − − − − − − − − −
Size 1.4 − X3 X3 X3 X3 − − − − − −
1 1 1 1
Size 1.5 − X X X X − − − − − −
Size 2.4 X − − − − − − − − − −
Size 3 − X2 X2 X2 X2 − − − − − −
BGE.. BGE 1.4 − o o o o X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 −
BGE 1.5 − • • • • X1 X1 X1 X1 X −
BGE 3 − • • • • X2 X2 X2 X2 X −
BS.. BS 24 − X X X X − − − − − −
BMS.. BMS 1.4 o o o o o − − − − − −
BMS 1.5 • • • • • − − − − − −
BMS 3 • • • • • − − − − − −
BME.. BME 1.4 o o o o o o o o o o −
BME 1.5 • • • • • • • • • X −
BME 3 • • • • • • • • • X −
BMH.. BMH 1.4 o o o o o o o o o – −
BMH 1.5 • • • • • • • • • − −
BMH 3 • • • • • • • • • − −
BMK.. BMK 1.4 o o o o o o o o o − −
BMK 1.5 • • • • • • • • • − −
BMK 3 • • • • • • • • • − −
BMKB.. BMKB • • • • • • • • • − −
1.5
BMP.. BMP 1.4 o o o o o o o o o − −
BMP 1.5 • • • • • • • • • − −
BMP 3 • • • • • • • • • − −
BMP 3.1 − − − − − − − − − • X
24745332/EN – 08/2018
BMV.. BMV 5 • • • • • • • • − − −
BSG.. BSG − • • • • X X X − − −

Technical data
Brake control 8
BE03 BE03 BE05 BE1 BE2 BE5 BE11 BE20 BE30, BE60, BE120,
with BE32 BE62 BE122
DRN63
BSR.. BG 1.2 + • − − − − − − − − − −
SR10
BG 2.4 + • − − − − − − − − − −
SR10
BGE1.5 + − • • • − − − − − − −
SR10
BGE 1.4 − o o o o o o o o − −
+ SR 15
BGE 3 + − • • • • • • − − − −
SR 11
BGE 3 + − • • • • • • • • − −
SR 15
BGE3 + − • • • − − − − − − −
SR10
BGE 1.5 − • • • • • • − − − −
+ SR 11
BGE 1.5 − • • • • • • • • − −
+ SR 15
BUR.. BG 1.2 + • − − − − − − − − − −
UR10
BG 2.4 + • − − − − − − − − − −
UR10
BGE 3 + − • • • • • − − − − −
UR 11
BGE 1.5 − • • • • • • • • − −
+ UR 15
BST.. BST 0.6S • • • • • • • • • − −
BST 0.7S • • • • • • • • • − −
BST 1.2S • • • • • • • • • − −
X Standard version
X1 Standard design with nominal brake voltage of 150 – 500 VAC
X2 Standard design with nominal brake voltage of 24/42 – 150 VAC
X3 Standard design with nominal brake voltage of 575 VAC
• Can be selected
o Optional with AC 575 V nominal brake voltage
– Not permitted
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Brake control
8.5.2 Motor wiring space

The following tables list the technical data of brake control systems for installation in
the motor wiring space. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to
make them easier to distinguish.
Type Function Voltage Holding Type Part num- Color

current ber code
IHmax in
DC A
BG.. Half-wave rectifier AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 Size 1.4 8278814 jet black
AC 90 – 500 V 1.2 Size 1.2 08269920 jet black
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 Size 1.5 8253846 jet black
AC 24 – 90 V 2.4 Size 2.4 08270198 Ma-
hogany
brown
AC 24 – 500 V 3.0 Size 3 8253862 Ma-
hogany
brown
BGE.. Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BGE 1.4 8278822 Vermil-
electronic switching ion
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BGE 1.5 8253854 Vermil-
ion
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BGE 3 8253870 Light
blue
BSR.. Half-wave rectifier + cur- AC 150 – 500 V 1.0 BGE1.5 + SR10 8253854 jet black
rent relay for cut-off in the 0826760X Gray
DC circuit
1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR 11 8253854 jet black
8267618 Gray
1.0 BGE 1.5 + SR 15 8253854 jet black
8267626 Gray
AC 42 – 150 V 1.0 BGE 3 + SR11 8253870 Ma-
8267618 hogany
brown
Gray
1.0 BGE 3 + SR15 8253870 Ma-
8267626 hogany
brown
Gray
BUR.. Half-wave rectifier + AC 150 – 500 V 1.0 BGE 1.5 + UR 15 8253854 Vermil-
24745332/EN – 08/2018
voltage relay for cut-off in 8267596 ion

the DC circuit Gray
AC 42 – 150 V 1.0 BGE 3 + UR 11 8253870 Light
8267588 blue
Gray

Technical data
Brake control 8
current ber code
IHmax in
DC A
BS24 Varistor protection circuit DC 24 V 5.0 BS24 8267634 Water
blue
BSG.. Electronic switching DC 24 V 5.0 BSG 8254591 Pure
white
BMP.. Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 2.8 BMP 3.11) 8295077 –
electronic switching, inte-
grated voltage relay for
cut-off in the DC circuit.
1) Only sizes 250 – 315
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Brake control
8.5.3 Control cabinet

The following tables list the technical data of brake control systems for installation in
the control cabinet. The different housings have different colors (= color code) to make
them easier to distinguish.

current ber code
IHmax in DC A
BMS.. Half-wave rectifier as BG AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMS 1.4 8298300 Tar
black
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMS 1.5 8258023 Tar
black
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMS 3 8258031 Ma-
hogany
brown
BME.. Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BME 1.4 8298319 Vermil-
electronic switching as ion
BGE
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BME 1.5 8257221 Vermil-
ion
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BME 3 825723X Light
blue
BMH.. Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMH 1.4 8298343 Signal
electronic switching and green
heating function
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMH 1.5 825818X Signal
green
AC 42 – 150 V 3 BMH 3 8258198 Zinc yel-
low
BMP.. Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMP 1.4 8298327 Light
electronic switching, inte- gray
grated voltage relay for
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMP 1.5 8256853 Light
cut-off in the DC circuit.
gray
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMP 3 8265666 Light
green
AC 230 – 575 V 2.8 BMP 3.11) 8295077 –
BMK.. Half-wave rectifier with AC 230 – 575 V 1.0 BMK 1.4 8298335 Water
electronic switching, blue
DC 24 V control input and
AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMK 1.5 8264635 Water
cut-off in the DC circuit
blue
AC 42 – 150 V 3.0 BMK 3 8265674 Light
pink
24745332/EN – 08/2018
BMKB Half-wave rectifier with AC 150 – 500 V 1.5 BMKB1.5 08281602 Water
.. electronic switching, con- blue
trol input (DC 24 V), rapid
stop, and LED status dis-
play

Technical data
Brake control 8
current ber code
IHmax in DC A
BMV.. Brake control unit with DC 24 V 5.0 BMV 5 13000063 Pure
electronic switching, white
DC 24 V control input and
fast cut-off
BST.. Safe brake control with AC 460 V 0.6 BST 0.6S 08299714 –
electronic switching, con-
AC 400 V 0.7 BST 0.7S 13000772 –
trol input (DC 24 V), and
safe control input AC 230 V 1.2 BST 1.2S 13001337 –
(DC 24 V). Supply via the
DC link of the inverter.
1) Only sizes 250 – 315
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Permitted rolling bearings
8.6 Permitted rolling bearings
8.6.1 Rolling bearing for DR..71 – 280 motors
Motors A-side bearing B-side bearing

AC motor Gearmotor AC motor Brakemotor
DR..71 6204-2Z-C3 6303-2Z-C3 6203-2Z-C3 6203-2RS-C3
DR..80, 6205-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3 6304-2RS-C3
DR..90 – 100 6306-2Z-C3 6205-2Z-C3 6205-2RS-C3
DR..112 – 132 6308-2Z-C3 6207-2Z-C3 6207-2RS-C3
DR..160 6309-2Z-C3 6209-2Z-C3 6209-2RS-C3
DR..180 6312-2Z-C3 6213-2Z-C3 6213-2RS-C3
DR..200 – 225 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2RS-C3
DR..250 – 280 6317-2Z-C4 6315-2Z-C3 6315-2RS-C3
8.6.2 Rolling bearings for DRN63 – 280, DR2..63 – 80 motors

AC motor Gearmotor AC motor Brakemotor
DRN63 6202-2Z-C3 6303-2Z-C3 6203-2Z-C3 6203-2Z-C3
DR2..63
DRN71 6204-2Z-C3 6203-2Z-C3
DR2..71
DRN80 6205-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3 6304-2Z-C3 6304-2RS-C3
DR2..80
DRN90 6305-2Z-C3 6205-2Z-C3 6205-2RS-C3
DRN100 6306-2Z-C3 6205-2Z-C3 6205-2RS-C3
DRN112 6308-2Z-C3 6207-2Z-C3 6207-2RS-C3
DRN132S 6308-2Z-C3 6308-2Z-C3 6207-2Z-C3 6207-2RS-C3
DRN132M/L 6308-2Z-C3 6309-2Z-C3 6209-2Z-C3 6209-2RS-C3
DRN160 6310-2Z-C3 6312-2Z-C3 6212-2Z-C3 6212-2RS-C3
DRN180 6311-2Z-C3 6312-2Z-C3 6212-2Z-C3 6212-2RS-C3
DRN200 6312-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2RS-C3
DRN225 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2Z-C3 6314-2RS-C3
DRN250 – 280 6317-2Z-C4 6315-2Z-C3
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Permitted rolling bearings 8
8.6.3 Rolling bearing for DR..315, DRN315 motors

AC motor Gearmotor AC motor Gearmotor
DR..315K, 6319-C3 6319-C3 6319-C3 6319-C3
DRN315S
DR..315S,
DRN315M
DR..315M, 6319-C3 6322-C3 6319-C3 6322-C3
DRN315L
DR..315L,
DRN315H
8.6.4 Rolling bearing for DR..250 – 315, DRN250 – 315 motors, with reinforced bearings /ERF

AC motor Gearmotor
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 NU317E-C3 6315-C3
DR..315K, DRN315S NU319E 6319-C3 6319-C3
DR..315S, DRN315M
DR..315M, DRN315L 6322-C3
DR..315L, DRN315H
8.6.5 Rolling bearing for DR..200 – 315, DRN200 – 315 motors, with current-insulated rolling
bearings /NIB
Motors B-side bearing

AC motor Gearmotor
DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 6314-C3-EI 6314-C3-EI
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 6315-Z-C3-EI 6315-Z-C3-EI
DR..315K, DRN315S 6319-C3-EI 6319-C3-EI
DR..315S, DRN315M
DR..315M, DRN315L 6322-C3-EI
DR..315L, DRN315H
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Lubricant tables
8.7 Lubricant tables
8.7.1 Lubricant table for rolling bearings
INFORMATION
Use of wrong bearing grease can damage the bearings.
Motors with sealed bearings

The bearings are 2Z or 2RS closed bearings and cannot be re-lubricated. They are
used for DR..71 – 280, DRN63 – 280, DR263 – 80 motors.
Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type DIN designation

1)
Motor rolling bear- -20 °C to +80 °C Mobil Polyrex EM K2P-20
ings
+20 °C to +100 °C Klüber Barrierta L55/22) KX2U
2)
-40 °C to +60 °C Kyodo Yushi Multemp SRL KE2N-40
2)
-20 °C to +60 °C SKF LHT23 KE2N-40
1) Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based bearing grease)
2) Synthetic lubricant (= synthetic-based bearing grease)
Motors with open bearings

Motors in the sizes DR..315 and DRN315 always have open bearings. If DR..250 –
280 and DRN225 – 280 motors have the relubrication option /NS, these sizes also
have open bearings.
Ambient temperature Manufacturer Type DIN designation

1)
Rolling bearing -20 °C to +80 °C Mobile Polyrex EM K2P-20
-40 °C to +60 °C SKF LGHP 21) K2N-40
1) Mineral lubricant (= mineral-based bearing grease)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Lubricant tables 8
8.7.2 Order information for lubricants, anti-corrosion agents and sealants
Lubricants, anti-corrosion agents, and sealants may be obtained directly from
SEW‑EURODRIVE using the following order numbers.
Use Manufacturer Type Quan- Order number

tity
Lubricant for rolling bear- Mobil Polyrex EM 400 g 03259420
ings
SKF LGHP2 400 g 09101276
Lubricant for sealing rings
Material: NBR/FKM Klüber Petamo GHY 133N 10 g 04963458
FUCHS LUBRITECH Gleitmo 100 S 1 kg 03258092
Material: EPDM/EPP Klüber Klübersynth BLR 46-122 10 g 03252663
®
Corrosion protection and SEW‑EURODRIVE NOCO fluid 5.5 g 09107819
lubricant
Sealant Marston Domsel SEW-L-Spezial 80 g 09112286
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Encoders
8.8 Encoders
8.8.1 EI7. B
Encoder EI7C EI76 EI72 EI71
DRN63.
for motor size DRN71. – 132S.
DR..71 – 132
Mounting type Integrated, without additional motor length
Supply voltage UB DC 9 V – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 120 mA
Output amplitude per track Vhigh Vcc - 3.5 V to Vcc
Vlow 0 V – 3 V
Signal output HTL (push-pull)
Max. output current per track Iout ± 60 mA
Max. pulse frequency fmax 1.44 kHz*
Incremental tracks, periods per revolution
A, B 24 6 2 1
C 0 0 0 0
Position resolution, increments per revolution A, B 96 24 8 4
Pulse duty factor 30% – 70% (typically: 50%
Phase offset A: B (n = constant) 70°– 110° (typically: 90°)
Vibration resistance according to EN 60068-2-6 at ≤10 g (98.1 m/s2)
5 Hz – 2 kHz
Shock resistance according to EN 60068-2-27 ≤100 g (981 m/s2)
Maximum speed nmax 3600 min-1
Ambient temperature Motor: -30 °C to +60 °C
Encoder: -30 °C to +85 °C
Degree of protection IP66
Connection DRN63.: M12 (8-
pin)
DRN71. – 132S: Terminal strip I8/K8 in the terminal box or M12 (8‑ or
4-pin)
DR..71 – 132: Terminal strip I8/K8 in the terminal box or M12 (8‑ or 4-
pin)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.8.2 ES7. and EG7.
Encoder ES7S EG7S ES7R EG7R ES7C EG7C
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280 DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280 DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – DRN80 – 132S DRN132M –
280 280 280
Supply voltage UB DC 7 V – 30 V DC 7 – 30 V DC 4.75 – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS 160 mARMS 250 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency fmax 150 kHz 120 kHz 120 kHz
Incremental tracks, periods 1024 (10 bits)
per revolution
Position resolution, incre- A, B 4096 (12 bits)
ments per revolution
Index track, periods per re- C 1 1 1
volution
Output amplitude per track Vhigh 1 VPP ≥ DC 2.5 V ≥ DC 2.5 V
Vlow ≤ DC 0.5 V ≤ DC 1.1 V
Signal output sin/cos TTL HTL
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS 25 mARMS 60 mARMS
Pulse duty factor sin/cos 1 : 1 ± 10% 1 : 1 ± 10%
Phase angle A: B 90° ± 3° 90° ± 20° 90° ± 20°
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2 ≤ 100 m/s2 ≤ 200 m/s2 ≤ 100 m/s2
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 2000 m/s2 ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 2000 m/s2 ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 2000 m/s2
Maximum speed nmax 6000 min-1 6000 min-1 6000 min-1
Degree of protection IP66 IP66 IP66
Port Terminal box on incremental encoder
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Encoders
8.8.3 AS7Y and AG7Y

Encoder AS7Y AG7Y
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – 280
Supply voltage UB DC 7 – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 150 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency fmax 200 kHz
Incremental tracks, periods per A, B 2048 (11 bits)
revolution C –
Output amplitude per track Vhigh 1 VPP
Vlow
Signal output sin/cos
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS
Pulse duty factor sin/cos
Phase angle A: B 90° ± 3°
Scanning code Gray code
Position resolution, increments A, B 8192 (13 bits)
per revolution
Multi-turn resolution, revolutions 4096 (12 bits)
Data transfer SSI interface, synchronous, serial
Serial data output Driver to EIA RS422
Serial pulse input Recommended receiver to EIA RS422
Clock frequency Permitted range: 100 – 2000 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
Clock-pulse space period 12 – 30 µs
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 2000 m/s2
-1
Maximum speed nmax 6000 min
Port Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.8.4 AS7W and AG7W
Encoder AS7W AG7W
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN80 – 132S DRN132M – 280
Supply voltage UB DC 7 – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS
Incremental tracks, periods per A, B 2048 (11 bits)
revolution C –
Output amplitude per track Vhigh 1 VPP
Vlow
Signal output sin/cos
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS
Pulse duty factor sin/cos
Scanning code Binary code
per revolution
Data transfer RS485
Serial pulse input Recommended driver to EIA RS422
Clock frequency 9600 baud
Clock-pulse space period – –
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2 ≤ 200 m/s2
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 2000 m/s2
-1
Port Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Encoders
8.8.5 EH7.
Encoder EH7R EH7T EH7C EH7S
For motors DR..315
DRN315
Supply voltage UB DC 10V – 30 V DC 5 V DC 10 V - 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mA 225 mA 140 mA
Max. pulse frequency fmax kHz 300 180
Incremental tracks, periods A, B 1024 (10 bits)
per revolution
Position resolution, incre- A, B 4096 (12 bits)
ments per revolution
Incremental tracks, periods C 1
per revolution
Output amplitude Vhigh ≥ 2.5 V VB -3 V 1 Vpp
Vlow ≤ 0.5 V ≤ 2.5 V
Signal output TTL (RS422) HTL sin/cos
Output current per track Iout 20 mA 30 mA 10 mA
Pulse duty factor 1 : 1 ± 20% 90° ± 10°
Phase angle A: B 90° ± 20° –
Vibration resistance at 10 Hz ≤ 100 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-6)
– 2 kHz
Shock resistance ≤ 2000 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-27)
Maximum rotational speed min-1 6000, 2500 at 60°C
nmax
Degree of protection IP65 (EN 60529)
Port 12-pin plug connector
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.8.6 AH7Y
Encoder AH7Y
For motors DR..315
DRN315
Supply voltage UB DC 9 V – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 160 mA
Incremental tracks, periods per revolu- A, B 2048 (11 bits)
tion C –
Output amplitude Vhigh ≥ 2.5 VPP
Vlow ≤ 0.5 VPP
Max. pulse frequency 120 kHz
Signal output TTL (RS422)
Output current per track Iout 20 mA
Pulse duty factor 1 : 1 ± 20%
Absolute encoder scanning code Gray code
Position resolution, increments per re- A, B 8192 (13 bits)
volution
Data transfer of absolute value Synchronous, serial (SSI)
Serial pulse input Optocoupler, recommended driver to EIA RS485
Clock frequency Permitted range: 100 – 800 kHz (max. 100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
Clock-pulse space period 12 ms – 30 ms
Vibration resistance at 10 Hz – 2 kHz ≤ 100 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-6)
Shock resistance ≤ 2000 m/s2 (EN 60088-2-27)
Maximum rotational speed nmax nmax 3500 min-1
Degree of protection IP56 (EN 60529)
Port Terminal strip on encoder
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Encoders
8.8.7 EV2.
Encoder EV2T EV2S EV2R EV2C
For motors DR..71 – DR..225
DRN71 – 225
DR2..71 – 80
Supply voltage UB DC 5 V DC 9 V – 26 V
Max. current consumption Iin 160 mARMS 120 mARMS 160 mARMS 250 mARMS
Incremental tracks, periods per re- A, B 1024 (10 bits)
volution
per revolution
Incremental tracks, periods per re- C 1
volution
Output amplitude per track Vhigh ≥ 2.5 V 1 VPP ≥ 2.5 V ≥ VB - 3.5 V
Vlow ≤ 0.5 V ≤ 0.5 V ≤ 3 V
Signal output TTL sin/cos TTL HTL
Output current per track Iout 25 mARMS 10 mARMS 25 mARMS 60 mARMS
Pulse duty factor 1 : 1 ± 20% sin/cos 1 : 1 ± 20%
Phase angle A: B 90 ° ± 20 ° 90 ° 90 ° ± 20 °
Data memory –
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s²
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 3000 m/s2 ≤ 1000 m/s2
-1
Mass m 0.36 kg
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Encoders 8
8.8.8 EV7.
Encoder EV7S EV7R EV7C
For motors DR..71 – 132
DRN71 – 132S
DR2..71 – 80
Supply voltage UB DC 7 V – 30 V DC 7 V – 30 V DC 4.75 V – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS 160 mARMS 250 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency fmax 150 kHz 120 kHz 120 kHz
Incremental tracks, periods per revolution A, B 1024 (10 bits)
Position resolution, increments per revolution A, B 4096 (12 bits)
Incremental tracks, periods per revolution C 1 1 1
Output amplitude per track Vhigh 1 VPP ≥ DC 2.5 V ≥ DC 2.5 V
Vlow ≤ DC 0.5 V ≤ DC 1.1 V
Signal output sin/cos TTL HTL
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS 25 mARMS 60 mARMS
Pulse duty factor sin/cos 1 : 1 ± 10% 1 : 1 ± 10%
Phase angle A: B 90° ± 3° 90° ± 20° 90° ± 20°
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s2 ≤ 100 m/s2 ≤ 100 m/s2
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 1000 m/s2 ≤ 1000 m/s2
-1 -1
Maximum speed nmax 6000 min 6000 min 6000 min-1
Degree of protection IP66 IP66 IP66
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Encoders
8.8.9 AV7W and AV7Y

Encoder AV7W AS7Y
For motors DR..71 – 132 DR..160 – 280
DRN71 – 132S DRN132M – 280
DR2..71 – 80
Supply voltage UB DC 7 – 30 V DC 7 V – 30 V
Max. current consumption Iin 140 mARMS 150 mARMS
Max. pulse frequency fmax 200 kHz 200 kHz
Incremental tracks, periods per A, B 2048 (11 bits) 2048 (11 bits)
revolution C – –
Output amplitude per track Vhigh 1 VPP 1 VPP
Vlow
Signal output sin/cos sin/cos
Output current per track Iout 10 mARMS 10 mARMS
Pulse duty factor sin/cos sin/cos
Phase angle A: B 90° ± 3° 90° ± 3°
Scanning code Binary code Gray code
per revolution
Multi-turn resolution, revolutions 65536 (12 bits) 4096 (12 bits)
Data transfer RS485 synchronous-serial
Serial data output Driver to EIA RS485 Driver to EIA RS422
Serial pulse input Recommended driver to EIA RS422 Recommended receiver to EIA RS422
Clock frequency 9600 baud Permitted range: 100 – 2000 kHz (max.
100 m cable length with 300 kHz)
Clock-pulse space period – 12 – 30 µs
2
Vibration resistance ≤ 100 m/s ≤ 100 m/s2
2
Shock resistance ≤ 1000 m/s ≤ 2000 m/s2
-1
Maximum speed nmax 6000 min 6000 min-1
Degree of protection IP66 IP66
Port Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover Terminal strip in pluggable connection cover
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
Diagnostic unit /DUE 8
8.9 Diagnostic unit /DUE
Sensors Ø 6 mm Ø 8 mm
DUE-d6-00 DUE-d8-00
Measuring range (MB) mm 1.5 2.0
Protection class IP66 IP66
Operating temperature -50 to +150 °C -50 to +150 °C
(sensor and cable)
Evaluation unit DUE-1K-00

Part number 21195609
Signal outputs (1 channel) OUT1: 4 – 20 mA
FCT1: DC 24 V (150 mA)
WEAR1: DC 24 V (150 mA)
Current consumption Max. mA 320
Min. mA 40
Supply voltage DC 24 V (± 15%)
Electromagnetic compatibility DIN EN 61800‑3
Operating temperature (evaluation unit) -40 to +105 °C
Humidity ≤ 90% rF
Protection class IP20 (in the closed terminal box up to IP66)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
8 Characteristic safety values
8.10 Characteristic safety values

8.10.1 Characteristic safety values for BE.. brakes
The values specified in the following table apply to BE.. brakes in standard applica-
tions.
Characteristic safety values according to

EN ISO 13849-1
Classification Category B
System structure 1-channel (cat. B)
MTTFD value Calculation via B10D value
BE03 20 × 106
BE05 16 × 106
BE1 12 × 106
BE2 8 × 106
BE5 6 × 106
BE11 3 × 106
B10D value BE20 2 × 106
BE30 1.5 × 106
BE32 1.5 × 106
BE60 1 × 106
BE62 1 × 106
BE120 0.25 × 106
BE122 0.25 × 106
SEW‑EURODRIVE offers BE.. bakes also as safety brakes up to size BE32. For more
information, consult the addendum to the operating instructions "Safety Encoders and
Safety Brakes – AC Motors DR.., DRN.., DR2.., EDR.., EDRN.. – Functional Safety".
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Technical data
S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor 8
8.11 S1 duty cycle DRK.. single-phase motor
The following section describes the data for DRK.. single-phase motor in S1 continu-
ous duty.
The specified starting torques result from the connection of a running capacitor or a
running capacitor with start-up capacitor connected in parallel respectively.
S1 operation with 1500/1800 min-1 (230 V)

MA / MN with CB CA for MA/MN
PN nN IN cos φ CB 100% 150%
Motors
-1
Hz kW min A μF % μF μF
50 1450 1.53 0.81 20 50 14 25
DRK71S4 0.18
60 1755 1.38 0.87 18 45 14 25
50 1455 2.05 0.80 25 45 16 35
DRK71M4 0.25
60 1760 1.80 0.89 25 50 14 30
50 1420 2.40 0.98 18 50 12 25
DRK80S4 0.37
60 1730 2.45 0.94 15 45 12 20
50 1430 3.45 0.97 25 50 12 30
DRK80M4 0.55
60 1740 3.45 0.94 20 50 12 25
50 1430 4.75 0.93 15+15 50 20 40
DRK90M4 0.75
60 1740 4.80 0.90 25 50 18 35
50 1415 6.6 0.97 20+25 50 30 70
DRK90L4 1.1
60 1725 6.8 0.93 15+20 55 30 50
CB Running capacitor
CA Start-up capacitor
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Malfunctions
9
9 Malfunctions
WARNING
CAUTION
Risk of burns.
NOTICE
Improper troubleshooting measures may damage the drive.
• Use only genuine spare parts in accordance with the valid parts list.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Malfunctions
Motor malfunctions 9
9.1 Motor malfunctions
Fault Possible cause Measure

Motor does not start up Supply cable interrupted Check the connections and (intermediate) ter-
minal points, correct if necessary
Brake does not release See chapter "Brake malfunctions"
Supply cable fuse has blown Replace fuse
Motor protection (switch) has Check that the motor protection (switch) is set
triggered correctly; current specification is on the name-
plate
Motor protection does not trip Check motor protection control
Malfunction in control or in the Observe the switching sequence; correct if
control process necessary
Motor only starts with Motor power designed for delta Correct the connection from star to delta;
difficulty or does not connection but connected in star Observe wiring diagram
start at all
Motor power designed for double- Correct the connection from star to double-
star connection but only connected star;
in star
Observe wiring diagram
Voltage or frequency differs con- Provide better power supply system; reduce
siderably from the setpoint, at the power supply load;
least when switching on the motor Check cross section of supply cable, replace
with cable of larger cross section if necessary
Motor does not start in Star connection does not provide If the delta inrush current is not too high (ob-
star connection, only in sufficient torque serve the regulations of the power supplier),
delta connection start up directly in delta;
Check the project planning and use a larger
motor or special design if necessary. Contact
SEW‑EURODRIVE
Contact fault on star/delta switch Check the switch, replace if necessary;
Check the connections
Incorrect direction of Motor connected incorrectly Swap 2 phases of the motor supply cable
rotation
Motor hums and has Brake does not release See chapter "Brake malfunctions"
high current consump-
Winding defective Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
tion
Rotor rubbing Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
Fuses blow or motor Short circuit in the motor supply Eliminate short circuit
protection trips immedi- cable
ately
Supply cables connected incor- Correct the connection;
24745332/EN – 08/2018
rectly Observe wiring diagram

Short circuit in the motor Send motor to specialist workshop for repair
Ground fault on motor Send motor to specialist workshop for repair

Malfunctions
9 Motor malfunctions

Severe speed loss un- Motor overload Measure power, check project planning and
der load use larger motor or reduce load if necessary
Voltage drops Check cross section of supply cable, replace
with cable of larger cross section if necessary
Motor heats up excess- Overload Measure power, check project planning and
ively (measure temper- use larger motor or reduce load if necessary
ature)
Insufficient cooling Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling
air passages, retrofit forced cooling fan if ne-
cessary. Check the air filter, clean or replace if
necessary
Ambient temperature too high Observe the permitted temperature range, re-
duce the load if necessary
Motor in delta connection instead Correct the wiring, observe the wiring diagram
of star connection as intended
Loose contact in supply cable (one Tighten loose contact, check connections, ob-
phase missing) serve wiring diagram
Fuse defective Look for and rectify cause; replace fuse
Line voltage deviates from the Adjust motor to line voltage
rated motor voltage by more than
5% (range A) / 10% (range B).
Operating mode (S1 to S10, Adjust the operating mode of the motor to the
DIN 57530) exceeded, e.g. caused required operating conditions; consult a pro-
by excessive switching frequency fessional to determine the proper drive, if ne-
cessary
Loud noises Ball bearing compressed, dirty or Re-align motor and the driven machine, in-
damaged spect rolling bearing and replace if necessary
Vibration of rotating parts Look for the case, possibly an imbalance; cor-
rect the cause, observe method for balancing
Foreign bodies in cooling air ducts Clean the cooling air ducts
For DR.. motors with rotor desig- Reduce the load
nation "J": Load too high
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Malfunctions
Brake malfunctions 9
9.2 Brake malfunctions

Brake does not re- Incorrect voltage on brake control Apply the correct voltage; brake voltage specified
lease unit on the nameplate
Brake control unit failed Renew brake control, check resistors and isolation
of the brake coils.
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Maximum permitted working air Measure and set working air gap.
gap exceeded because brake lining If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.
worn down.
Voltage drop along supply cable > Provide correct connection voltage: brake voltage
10% specifications on the nameplate. Check the cross
section of the brake supply cable, increase cross
section if necessary.
Inadequate cooling, brake over- Provide for cooling air supply or clear cooling air
heating passages, check air filter, clean or replace if ne-
cessary. Replace type BG brake rectifier with type
BGE.
Brake coil has interturn short circuit Check resistors and isolation of the brake coils;
or a short circuit to frame Replace complete brake and brake control (spe-
cialist workshop);
Check switchgear, replace if necessary
Rectifier defective Replace rectifier and brake coil; it may be more
economical to replace the complete brake.
Brake does not Working air gap not correct Measure and set working air gap.
brake If the brake disk is too thin, replace the brake disk.
Brake lining worn Replace entire brake lining carrier.
Incorrect braking torque. Check the dimensioning and, if necessary,
change braking torque by type and number of
brake springs, or by selecting a different brake.
Brake does not Working air gap so large that set- Set the working air gap.
brake ting nuts for the manual release
come into contact.
Manual brake release device not Set the setting nuts for the manual release cor-
set correctly rectly
Brake locked by manual brake re- Loosen the set screw, remove if needed.
lease HF
Brake is applied Brake is switched only on AC Switch both the DC and AC circuits (e.g. by retro-
with time lag voltage side fitting a SR current relay to BSR or a UR voltage
24745332/EN – 08/2018
relay to BUR);
Observe wiring diagram

Malfunctions
9 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter

Noises in vicinity Gearing wear on the brake disk or Check the project planning, replace the brake disk
of brake the driver caused by jerky start-up if necessary
Have a specialist workshop replace the carrier
Alternating torques due to incor- Check correct setting of inverter according to its
rectly set inverter operating instructions, correct if necessary.
9.3 Malfunctions when operated with a frequency inverter

The symptoms described in chapter "Motor malfunctions" (→ 2 215) may also occur
when the motor is operated with a frequency inverter. Please refer to the frequency in-
verter operating instructions for the meaning of the problems that occur and to find in-
formation about rectifying the problems.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Malfunctions
Customer service 9
9.4 Customer service
Have the following information available if you require customer service assist-
ance:
• Nameplate data (complete)
• Nature and extent of the problem
• Time the failure occurred and any accompanying circumstances
• Assumed cause
• Ambient conditions e.g.:
– Ambient temperature
– Humidity
– Installation altitude
– Dirt
– etc.
9.5 Disposal
Dispose of the motors in accordance with the material structure and the regulations in
force:
• Iron
• Aluminum
• Copper
• Plastics
• Electronic parts
• Oil and grease (not mixed with solvents)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
10 Appendix
10.1 Wiring diagrams
INFORMATION
The motor should be connected as shown in the connection wiring diagram or the ter-
minal assignment diagram, which are supplied with the motor. The following section
only shows a selection of the common types of connections. You can obtain the rel-
evant wiring diagrams free of charge from SEW‑EURODRIVE.
10.1.1 Delta and star connection in wiring diagram R13 (68001 xx 06)
For all motors with one speed, direct on-line, or W/m start-up.
Delta connection
The following figure shows m connection for low voltage.
[1] [2]
W2 U2 V2
U2 V2 W2
(T6) (T4) (T5)
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3) U1 V1 W1
[3] (T1) (T2) (T3)
L1 L2 L3
9007199497344139
[1] Motor winding [3] Incoming cables

[2] Motor terminal board
Star connection
The following figure shows W connection for high voltage.
[1] [2]
U2 V2 W2 W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6) (T6) (T4) (T5)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
U1 V1 W1
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[3] (T1) (T2) (T3)

L1 L2 L3
9007199497339147

Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 – L2

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.2 Delta connection with wiring diagram R72 (68192 xx 09)
For all motors with one speed and direct power-on.
Delta connection, Double-delta connection

The following figure shows m connection for high voltages and m m connection for
low voltages.
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
U2 V2 W2
T4 T5 T6
[1]
U3 V3 W3
T7 T8 T9
U4 V4 W4
T10 T11 T12
[2] [2]
V3 W3 U3 V3 W3 U3
T8 T9 T7 T8 T9 T7
V2 W2 U2 V2 W2 U2
T5 T6 T4 T5 T6 T4
V4 W4 U4
T11 T12 T1 V4 W4 U4
T11 T12 T10
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3 U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[3] L1 L2 L3 [3]
L1 L2 L3
9007201560668427
[1] Motor winding

[3] Incoming cables
Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 – L2

24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
10.1.3 Star connection with wiring diagram R76 (68043 xx 06)

For all motors with one speed and direct power-on.
Star connection, double-star connection

The following figure shows W connection for high voltages and W W connection for low
voltages.
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[1]
U2 V2 W2
T4 T5 T6
U3 V3 W3
T7 T8 T9
[4]
W2 U2 V2 W2 W3 U2 U3 V2 V3
T6 T4 T5 [2] T6 T9 T4 T7 T5 T8 [2]
U1 U3 V1 V3 W1 W3 U1 V1 W1
T1 T7 T2 T8 T3 T9 T1 T2 T3
[3] L1 L2 L3 [3] L1 L2 L3
2305925515

[2] Motor terminal board [4] Star point connected in motor
Direction of rotation reversal: Swap connection of 2 incoming cables, L1 - L2
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.4 Motor protection with /TF or /TH for DR..71 – 280, DRN63 – 280, DR2..63 – 80 motors
INFORMATION
The following shows an example terminal assignment. The actual terminal assign-
ment is included in the motor delivery as wiring diagram.
/TF, /TH
The following figures show examples for connection of motor protection with /TF PTC
thermistor sensors or /TH bimetallic thermostats.
Either a two-pin terminal clip or a five-pin connection terminal is available for connect-
ing to the trip switch.
Example: /TF, /TH to 2-pin terminal strip
1b
2b
9007199728684427
1b 2b
TF/TH TF/TH
Example: 2x /TF, /TH to 5-pin terminal strip
18014398983427083
1b 2b 3b 4b 5b
1.TF/TH 1.TF/TH 2.TF/TH 2.TF/TH –
2x /TF, /TH with anti-condensation heating

The following illustration shows the connection of the motor protection with 2 /TF PTC
thermistor sensors or /TH bimetallic thermostats and Hx anti-condensation heating.
1b
2b
9007199728684427
1b 2b
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Hx Hx

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
18014398983427083
1b 2b 3b 4b 5b
1.TF/TH 1.TF/TH 2.TF/TH 2.TF/TH –
10.1.5 Motor protection with /TF or /TH for DR..315, DRN315 motors
INFORMATION
The following shows an example terminal assignment. The actual terminal assign-
ment is included in the motor delivery as wiring diagram.
/TF, /TH
The following figures show examples for connection of motor protection with /TF PTC
thermistor sensors or /TH bimetallic thermostats.
Depending on the version, an "x-pin" terminal strip is available for connection to the
trip switch.
Example: /TF, /TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/
1.TH 1.TH
473405707
Example: 2x /TF, /TH to terminal strip
1.TF/ 1.TF/ 2.TF/ 2.TF/

1.TH 1.TH 2.TH 2.TH
473410187
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.6 EI7.B built-in encoder
Connection via terminal strip

The encoder is equipped with a 10-pole terminal strip for connection:
a
c
d
b
1 10 1 4
9007207579353739
INFORMATION
The ranges 1a – 10a, 1c – 4c and 1d – 4d have been pre-configured by
SEW‑EURODRIVE. The must not be changed.
Range 1b – 10b is intended for customer adjustments.
Basic connection:
Connections 1a – 10a, 1c – 4c and 1d – 4d lead to the encoder or to the motor.
Connections 1b – 10b lead to the cable gland.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4
a TF11) TF11) TF21) TF21) +UB1) GND1) A1) A1) B1) B1) see below c
Opt. Opt. (GY) (PK) (BN) (WH) (YE) (GN)
b TF1 TF1 TF2 TF2 +UB GND A A B B see below d
Opt. Opt.
1) Pre-configured by SEW‑EURODRIVE. Do not alter the setting!
Pin assignment EI7C B Pin assignment EI76 B

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
GND_ n. c. n. c. n. c. c GND_ n. c. n. c. n. c.1) c
Config Config
(BU)1) (BU)1)
EI7C1) n. c.1) n. c.1) n. c.1) d n. c.1) EI761) n. c.1) n. c.1) d
(RD) (RD)
1) Pre-configured by SEW-EURODRIVE. Do not alter the setting!
Pin assignment EI72 B Pin assignment EI71 B

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1) 1) 1) 1) 1)
GND_ n. c. n. c. n. c. c GND_ n. c. n. c. n. c.1) c
Config Config
(BU)1) (BU)1)
24745332/EN – 08/2018
n. c.1) n. c.1) EI721) n. c.1) d n. c.1) n. c.1) n. c.1) EI711) d

(RD) (RD)
1) Pre-configured by SEW-EURODRIVE. Do not alter the setting!

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
Connection via M12 plug connector

A 8-pin or a 4-pin M12 plug connector is available for the connection.
4-pin M12 plug connector AVSE 8-pin M12 plug connector AVRE
• A coded Pin 1: +UB • A coded Pin 1: +UB
• Male Pin 2: B • Male Pin 2: GND
2 1
Pin 3: GND 2 1 Pin 3: A
3 7
3 4 Pin 4: A 8 6 Pin 4: A
4 5
Pin 5: B
Pin 6: B
Pin 7: TF1
Pin 8: TF1
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.7 BGE..; BS..; BSG..; BUR.. brake control
BG../BGE..
Wiring diagram The following illustration shows the wiring for BG.. and BGE.. brake rectifiers for the
B100 AC-side shut-off as well as the DC and AC-side shutoff.
DC
AC AC
BGE BGE
BG BG
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
WH RD BU WH RD
[1] [1]
BU
U AC U AC
242604811
[1] Brake coil
BS24/BSG..
Wiring diagram The following illustration shows the DC 24 V connection of the BS24 brake protection
B100 or BSG.. control unit.
BS24
BSG
1 2 3 4 5
WH RD BU
[1]
- +
24V DC
9007199497347467
24745332/EN – 08/2018
[1] Brake coil

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
BUR
NOTICE
Malfunction caused by incorrect brake connection for frequency inverter operation.
• Do not connect the brake to the terminal board of the motor.
Wiring diagram The following figure shows the wiring for BUR.. brake control
B100
BGE
BG
1 2 3 4 5
RD
[4]
[1]
U~ WH RD BU
(VAC ) BU
[3] [3] [2]

BN / BK
BN / BK
242608139
[1] Brake coil BN = UR 11 (42 – 150 V)

[2] UR11/UR15 voltage relay BK = UR 15 (150 – 500 V)
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.8 BSR.. brake control
Brake voltage = phase-to-neutral voltage

BSR.. brake control for single speed drives in line operation (basic wiring diagram
R13)
Wiring diagram The white interconnecting wires are the ends of a converter loop and, depending on
R13A/R13B the motor connection, must be connected to the motor terminal block instead of the m
or W bridge.
The following figure shows the factory wiring for BSR.. brake control.
For ex-
ample
Motor: AC 230 V/AC 400 V
Brake: AC 230 V
BGE BGE
BG BG
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
WH RD WH RD
[1] [1]
RD BU RD BU
BU BU
[2] [2]
WH WH WH WH
W2 U2 V2
W2 U2 V2 (T6) (T4) (T5)
(T6) (T4) (T5) W1
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 (T3)
(T1) (T2) (T3) (T1) (T2)
L1 L2 L3
L1 L2 L3
18014398752081803
[1] Brake coil

[2] SR10/11/15/19 current relay
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
Brake voltage = Line voltage

Wiring diagram The white interconnecting wires are the ends of a converter loop and, depending on
R13C the motor connection, must be connected to the motor terminal block instead of the W
bridge.
The following figure shows the factory wiring for BSR.. brake control.
For ex-
ample
Motor: AC 400 V
Brake: AC 400 V
BGE
BG
1 2 3 4 5
WH RD
[1]
BU
RD BU
[2]
WH WH
W2 U2 V2
U1 V1 W1 [3]
L1 L2 L3
17564599179
[1] Brake coil

[2] SR10/11/15/19 current relay
[3] Terminal board
Further wiring diagrams for BSR.. brake control

Wiring diagrams for BSR.. brake control in combination to the following drives are
available from SEW‑EURODRIVE upon request.
24745332/EN – 08/2018
• Multi-voltage motors according to basic wiring diagram R76 or R72

• Single speed drives with KCC cage clamp (basic wiring diagram A13 or C13)

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
10.1.9 BMP3.1 brake control in the terminal box
INFORMATION
Separate supply cables are required for the voltage supply.
BMP3.1
The following illustration shows the wiring for the BMP3.1 brake rectifier for cut-off in
the AC circuit and cut-off in the DC and AC circuit.
U AC U AC
1 2 3 DC 1 2 3
AC AC
BMP3.1 BMP3.1
13 14 15 13 14 15
RD WH RD WH BU
[1] [1]
BU
9007199620491403
[1] Brake coil

24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
10.1.10 Forced cooling fan /V
Delta Steinmetz
The following figure shows the wiring of the V forced cooling fan for delta-Steinmetz
connection for 1-phase operation.
PE L1 N
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
U2 V2 W2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
L N
9007199778089483
Star connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the /V forced cooling fan for star connection.
PE L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
U2 V2 W2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
L1 L2 L3
9007199778091147
Delta connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the /V forced cooling fan for delta connection.
PE L1 L2 L3
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
W2 U2 V2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
U1 V1 W1
(T1) (T2) (T3)
24745332/EN – 08/2018
U2 V2 W2
(T4) (T5) (T6)
L1 L2 L3
18014399032833803

Appendix
Wiring diagrams 10
DC 24 V connection
The following figure shows the wiring of the /V forced cooling fan for DC 24 V.
[3]
BU RD
[2]
M [1]
=
+ -
DC 24 V
9007201648125067
[1] Forced cooling fan

[2] Terminal strip
[3] Polarity reversal protection diode
NOTICE
Damage to the forced cooling fan due to incorrect connection.
• Observe the polarity when connecting the forced cooling fan.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Appendix
10 Wiring diagrams
10.1.11 DRK... single-phase motor

ER10 wiring dia- [4] [5]
gram U1 Z1
[1]
U1 Z2 U1 Z2
U2 Z2 [2] [2]
Z1 U2
Z1 U2
[8] [8]
[7] CB [3] [3] CB
[7]
CA CA [6]
[6]
[9] [9]
11919510027
[1] Motor winding [6] Starting capacitor, switchable

[2] Motor terminal [7] Running capacitor
[3] Incoming cables [8] Further running capacitors (if avail-
[4] Counterclockwise rotation able)
[5] CW rotation, connected at factory [9] All-pole power switch
ER11 wiring dia- [4] [5]

gram W2 U2 V2 W2 U2 V2
[2] [2]
U1 V1 W1 U1 V1 W1
[1]
U2 V2 W2
T4 T5 T6
[7] [7]
[6] [6]
U1 V1 W1
T1 T2 T3
[3] CA [3] CA
[8] [8]
11919511947
[1] Motor winding [5] CW rotation, connected at factory

24745332/EN – 08/2018
[2] Motor terminal board [6] Starting capacitor, switchable

[3] Incoming cables [7] Running capacitor
[4] Counterclockwise rotation [8] All-pole power switch

Appendix
Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2 10
10.2 Auxiliary terminals 1 and 2
The following figure shows the arrangement of the auxiliary terminals for the different
terminal box positions.
Terminal box position 2 and X, here X1) Terminal box position 1 and 3, here 3
[2]
[A]
[1] [3]
[B]
[x]
3572208523
1) If auxiliary terminal 2 is not provided, you can install auxiliary terminal 1 in the same position.
[1] Terminal box position 1 [X] Terminal box position X

[2] Terminal box system 2 [A] Auxiliary terminal 1
[3] Terminal box system 3 [B] Auxiliary terminal 2
Regardless of the terminal box position, auxiliary terminal 1 must always be mounted
parallel to the terminal board.
The terminal structure can vary depending on the terminal box design.
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Address list
11
11 Address list
Algeria
Sales Algiers REDUCOM Sarl Tel. +213 21 8214-91
16, rue des Frères Zaghnoune Fax +213 21 8222-84
Bellevue http://www.reducom-dz.com
16200 El Harrach Alger info@reducom-dz.com
Argentina
Assembly Buenos Aires SEW EURODRIVE ARGENTINA S.A. Tel. +54 3327 4572-84
Sales Ruta Panamericana Km 37.5, Lote 35 Fax +54 3327 4572-21
(B1619IEA) Centro Industrial Garín http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Prov. de Buenos Aires sewar@sew-eurodrive.com.ar
Australia
Assembly Melbourne SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 3 9933-1000
Sales 27 Beverage Drive Fax +61 3 9933-1003
Service Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.au
enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Sydney SEW-EURODRIVE PTY. LTD. Tel. +61 2 9725-9900
9, Sleigh Place, Wetherill Park Fax +61 2 9725-9905
New South Wales, 2164 enquires@sew-eurodrive.com.au
Austria
Assembly Vienna SEW-EURODRIVE Ges.m.b.H. Tel. +43 1 617 55 00-0
Sales Richard-Strauss-Straße 24 Fax +43 1 617 55 00-30
Service 1230 Wien http://www.sew-eurodrive.at
sew@sew-eurodrive.at
Bangladesh
Sales Bangladesh SEW-EURODRIVE INDIA PRIVATE LIMITED Tel. +88 01729 097309
345 DIT Road salesdhaka@seweurodrivebangladesh.com
East Rampura
Dhaka-1219, Bangladesh
Belarus
Sales Minsk Foreign unitary production enterprise SEW- Tel. +375 17 298 47 56 / 298 47 58
EURODRIVE Fax +375 17 298 47 54
RybalkoStr. 26 http://www.sew.by
220033 Minsk sales@sew.by
Belgium
Assembly Brussels SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 16 386-311
Sales Researchpark Haasrode 1060 Fax +32 16 386-336
Service Evenementenlaan 7 http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
3001 Leuven info@sew-eurodrive.be
Service Competence Industrial SEW-EURODRIVE n.v./s.a. Tel. +32 84 219-878
Center Gears Rue de Parc Industriel, 31 Fax +32 84 219-879
6900 Marche-en-Famenne http://www.sew-eurodrive.be
service-IG@sew-eurodrive.be
Brazil
Production São Paulo SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3835-8000
Sales Estrada Municipal José Rubim, 205 – Rodovia sew@sew.com.br
Service Santos Dumont Km 49
Indaiatuba – 13347-510 – SP
Assembly Rio Claro SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 19 3522-3100
Sales Rodovia Washington Luiz, Km 172 Fax +55 19 3524-6653
Service Condomínio Industrial Conpark montadora.rc@sew.com.br
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Caixa Postal: 327

13501-600 – Rio Claro / SP
Joinville SEW-EURODRIVE Brasil Ltda. Tel. +55 47 3027-6886
Rua Dona Francisca, 12.346 – Pirabeiraba Fax +55 47 3027-6888
89239-270 – Joinville / SC filial.sc@sew.com.br
Bulgaria
Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GmbH Tel. +359 2 9151160
Bogdanovetz Str.1 Fax +359 2 9151166
1606 Sofia bever@bever.bg

Address list
11
Cameroon
Sales Douala SEW-EURODRIVE S.A.R.L. Tel. +237 233 39 02 10
Ancienne Route Bonabéri Fax +237 233 39 02 10
P.O. Box sew@sew-eurodrive-cm
B.P 8674
Douala-Cameroun
Canada
Assembly Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 905 791-1553
Sales 210 Walker Drive Fax +1 905 791-2999
Service Bramalea, ON L6T 3W1 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ca
l.watson@sew-eurodrive.ca
Vancouver SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 604 946-5535
Tilbury Industrial Park Fax +1 604 946-2513
7188 Honeyman Street b.wake@sew-eurodrive.ca
Delta, BC V4G 1G1
Montreal SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. Tel. +1 514 367-1124
2555 Rue Leger Fax +1 514 367-3677
Lasalle, PQ H8N 2V9 a.peluso@sew-eurodrive.ca
Chile
Assembly Santiago de SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE LTDA Tel. +56 2 2757 7000
Sales Chile Las Encinas 1295 Fax +56 2 2757 7001
Service Parque Industrial Valle Grande http://www.sew-eurodrive.cl
LAMPA ventas@sew-eurodrive.cl
Santiago de Chile
P.O. Box
Casilla 23 Correo Quilicura - Santiago - Chile
China
Production Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 22 25322612
Assembly No. 78, 13th Avenue, TEDA Fax +86 22 25323273
Sales Tianjin 300457 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cn
Service info@sew-eurodrive.cn
Assembly Suzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Suzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 512 62581781
Sales 333, Suhong Middle Road Fax +86 512 62581783
Service Suzhou Industrial Park suzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Jiangsu Province, 215021
Guangzhou SEW-EURODRIVE (Guangzhou) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 20 82267890
No. 9, JunDa Road Fax +86 20 82267922
East Section of GETDD guangzhou@sew-eurodrive.cn
Guangzhou 510530
Shenyang SEW-EURODRIVE (Shenyang) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 24 25382538
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 24 25382580
Shenyang Economic Technological Develop- shenyang@sew-eurodrive.cn
ment Area
Shenyang, 110141
Taiyuan SEW-EURODRIVE (Taiyuan) Co,. Ltd. Tel. +86-351-7117520
No.3, HuaZhang Street, Fax +86-351-7117522
TaiYuan Economic & Technical Development taiyuan@sew-eurodrive.cn
Zone
ShanXi, 030032
Wuhan SEW-EURODRIVE (Wuhan) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 27 84478388
10A-2, 6th Road Fax +86 27 84478389
No. 59, the 4th Quanli Road, WEDA wuhan@sew-eurodrive.cn
430056 Wuhan
Xi'An SEW-EURODRIVE (Xi'An) Co., Ltd. Tel. +86 29 68686262
No. 12 Jinye 2nd Road Fax +86 29 68686311
Xi'An High-Technology Industrial Development xian@sew-eurodrive.cn
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Zone
Xi'An 710065
Sales Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Tel. +852 36902200
Service Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Fax +852 36902211
Hong Leong Industrial Complex contact@sew-eurodrive.hk
No. 4, Wang Kwong Road
Kowloon, Hong Kong

Address list
11
Colombia
Assembly Bogota SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Tel. +57 1 54750-50
Sales Calle 17 No. 132-18 Fax +57 1 54750-44
Service Interior 2 Bodega 6, Manzana B http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.co
Santafé de Bogotá sew@sew-eurodrive.com.co
Croatia
Sales Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. Tel. +385 1 4613-158
Service Zeleni dol 10 Fax +385 1 4613-158
10 000 Zagreb kompeks@inet.hr
Czech Republic
Assembly Hostivice SEW-EURODRIVE CZ s.r.o. Tel. +420 255 709 601
Sales Floriánova 2459 Fax +420 235 350 613
Service 253 01 Hostivice http://www.sew-eurodrive.cz
sew@sew-eurodrive.cz
Drive Service +420 800 739 739 (800 SEW SEW) Service
Hotline / 24 Tel. +420 255 709 632
Hour Service Fax +420 235 358 218
servis@sew-eurodrive.cz
Denmark
Assembly Copenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Tel. +45 43 95 8500
Sales Geminivej 28-30 Fax +45 43 9585-09
Service 2670 Greve http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk
sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Egypt
Sales Cairo Copam Egypt Tel. +202 44812673 / 79 (7 lines)
Service for Engineering & Agencies Fax +202 44812685
Building 10, Block 13005, First Industrial Zone, http://www.copam-egypt.com
Obour City Cairo copam@copam-egypt.com
Estonia
Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Tel. +372 6593230
Reti tee 4 Fax +372 6593231
75301 Peetri küla, Rae vald, Harjumaa http://www.alas-kuul.ee
veiko.soots@alas-kuul.ee
Finland
Assembly Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Sales Vesimäentie 4 Fax +358 3 780-6211
Service 15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Service Hollola SEW-EURODRIVE OY Tel. +358 201 589-300
Keskikankaantie 21 Fax +358 3 780-6211
15860 Hollola http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
Production Karkkila SEW Industrial Gears Oy Tel. +358 201 589-300
Assembly Santasalonkatu 6, PL 8 Fax +358 201 589-310
03620 Karkkila, 03601 Karkkila http://www.sew-eurodrive.fi
sew@sew.fi
France
Production Hagenau SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 73 67 00
Sales 48-54 route de Soufflenheim Fax +33 3 88 73 66 00
Service B. P. 20185 http://www.usocome.com
67506 Haguenau Cedex sew@usocome.com
Production Forbach SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 87 29 38 00
Zone industrielle
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Technopôle Forbach Sud

B. P. 30269
57604 Forbach Cedex
Brumath SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 3 88 37 48 00
1 Rue de Bruxelles
67670 Mommenheim Cedex
Assembly Bordeaux SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 5 57 26 39 00
Sales Parc d'activités de Magellan Fax +33 5 57 26 39 09
Service 62 avenue de Magellan – B. P. 182
33607 Pessac Cedex

Address list
11
France
Lyon SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 4 74 99 60 00
75 rue Antoine Condorcet Fax +33 4 74 99 60 15
38090 Vaulx-Milieu
Nantes SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 2 40 78 42 00
Parc d’activités de la forêt Fax +33 2 40 78 42 20
4 rue des Fontenelles
44140 Le Bignon
Paris SEW-USOCOME Tel. +33 1 64 42 40 80
Zone industrielle Fax +33 1 64 42 40 88
2 rue Denis Papin
77390 Verneuil I'Étang
Gabon
Sales Libreville SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +241 03 28 81 55
183, Rue 5.033.C, Lalala à droite +241 06 54 81 33
P.O. Box 15682 http://www.sew-eurodrive.cm
Libreville sew@sew-eurodrive.cm
Germany
Headquarters Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Production Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1970
Sales 76646 Bruchsal http://www.sew-eurodrive.de
sew@sew-eurodrive.de
Production / Industrial Bruchsal SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Gears Christian-Pähr-Str. 10 Fax +49 7251 75-2970
76646 Bruchsal
Production Graben SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251-2970
76676 Graben-Neudorf
Östringen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG, Werk Tel. +49 7253 9254-0
Östringen Fax +49 7253 9254-90
Franz-Gurk-Straße 2 oestringen@sew-eurodrive.de
76684 Östringen
Service Competence Mechanics / SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1710
Center Mechatronics Ernst-Blickle-Straße 1 Fax +49 7251 75-1711
76676 Graben-Neudorf scc-mechanik@sew-eurodrive.de
Electronics SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75-1780
Ernst-Blickle-Straße 42 Fax +49 7251 75-1769
76646 Bruchsal scc-elektronik@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Technology North SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 5137 8798-30
Center Alte Ricklinger Straße 40-42 Fax +49 5137 8798-55
30823 Garbsen (Hannover) dtc-nord@sew-eurodrive.de
East SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 3764 7606-0
Dänkritzer Weg 1 Fax +49 3764 7606-30
08393 Meerane (Zwickau) dtc-ost@sew-eurodrive.de
South SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 89 909552-10
Domagkstraße 5 Fax +49 89 909552-50
85551 Kirchheim (München) dtc-sued@sew-eurodrive.de
West SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 2173 8507-30
Siemensstraße 1 Fax +49 2173 8507-55
40764 Langenfeld (Düsseldorf) dtc-west@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Center Berlin SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 306331131-30
Alexander-Meißner-Straße 44 Fax +49 306331131-36
12526 Berlin dc-berlin@sew-eurodrive.de
Ludwigshafen SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7251 75 3759
c/o BASF SE Fax +49 7251 75 503759
Gebäude W130 Raum 101 dc-ludwigshafen@sew-eurodrive.de
24745332/EN – 08/2018
67056 Ludwigshafen
Saarland SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 6831 48946 10
Gottlieb-Daimler-Straße 4 Fax +49 6831 48946 13
66773 Schwalbach Saar – Hülzweiler dc-saarland@sew-eurodrive.de
Ulm SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 7348 9885-0
Dieselstraße 18 Fax +49 7348 9885-90
89160 Dornstadt dc-ulm@sew-eurodrive.de

Address list
11
Germany
Würzburg SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG Tel. +49 931 27886-60
Nürnbergerstraße 118 Fax +49 931 27886-66
97076 Würzburg-Lengfeld dc-wuerzburg@sew-eurodrive.de
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service 0 800 SEWHELP
0 800 7394357
Great Britain
Assembly Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Tel. +44 1924 893-855
Sales DeVilliers Way Fax +44 1924 893-702
Service Trident Park http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.uk
Normanton info@sew-eurodrive.co.uk
West Yorkshire
WF6 1GX
Drive Service Hotline / 24 Hour Service Tel. 01924 896911
Greece
Sales Athens Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. Tel. +30 2 1042 251-34
12, K. Mavromichali Street Fax +30 2 1042 251-59
P.O. Box 80136 http://www.boznos.gr
18545 Piraeus info@boznos.gr
Hungary
Sales Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. Tel. +36 1 437 06-58
Service Csillaghegyí út 13. Fax +36 1 437 06-50
1037 Budapest http://www.sew-eurodrive.hu
office@sew-eurodrive.hu
Iceland
Sales Reykjavik Varma & Vélaverk ehf. Tel. +354 585 1070
Knarrarvogi 4 Fax +354 585)1071
104 Reykjavík http://www.varmaverk.is
vov@vov.is
India
Registered Office Vadodara SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 265 3045200
Assembly Plot No. 4, GIDC Fax +91 265 3045300
Sales POR Ramangamdi • Vadodara - 391 243 http://www.seweurodriveindia.com
Service Gujarat salesvadodara@seweurodriveindia.com
Assembly Chennai SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 44 37188888
Sales Plot No. K3/1, Sipcot Industrial Park Phase II Fax +91 44 37188811
Service Mambakkam Village saleschennai@seweurodriveindia.com
Sriperumbudur - 602105
Kancheepuram Dist, Tamil Nadu
Pune SEW-EURODRIVE India Private Limited Tel. +91 21 35 628700
Plant: Plot No. D236/1, Fax +91 21 35 628715
Chakan Industrial Area Phase- II, salespune@seweurodriveindia.com
Warale, Tal- Khed,
Pune-410501, Maharashtra
Indonesia
Sales Medan PT. Serumpun Indah Lestari Tel. +62 61 687 1221
Jl.Pulau Solor no. 8, Kawasan Industri Medan Fax +62 61 6871429 / +62 61 6871458 / +62
II 61 30008041
Medan 20252 sil@serumpunindah.com
serumpunindah@yahoo.com
http://www.serumpunindah.com
Jakarta PT. Cahaya Sukses Abadi Tel. +62 21 65310599
Komplek Rukan Puri Mutiara Blok A no 99, Fax +62 21 65310600
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Sunter csajkt@cbn.net.id
Jakarta 14350
Jakarta PT. Agrindo Putra Lestari Tel. +62 21 2921-8899
JL.Pantai Indah Selatan, Komplek Sentra In- Fax +62 21 2921-8988
dustri Terpadu, Pantai indah Kapuk Tahap III, aplindo@indosat.net.id
Blok E No. 27 http://www.aplindo.com
Jakarta 14470

Address list
11
Indonesia
Surabaya PT. TRIAGRI JAYA ABADI Tel. +62 31 5990128
Jl. Sukosemolo No. 63, Galaxi Bumi Permai Fax +62 31 5962666
G6 No. 11 sales@triagri.co.id
Surabaya 60111 http://www.triagri.co.id
Surabaya CV. Multi Mas Tel. +62 31 5458589
Jl. Raden Saleh 43A Kav. 18 Fax +62 31 5317220
Surabaya 60174 sianhwa@sby.centrin.net.id
http://www.cvmultimas.com
Ireland
Sales Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. Tel. +353 1 830-6277
Service 48 Moyle Road Fax +353 1 830-6458
Dublin Industrial Estate http://www.alperton.ie
Glasnevin, Dublin 11 info@alperton.ie
Israel
Sales Tel Aviv Liraz Handasa Ltd. Tel. +972 3 5599511
Ahofer Str 34B / 228 Fax +972 3 5599512
58858 Holon http://www.liraz-handasa.co.il
office@liraz-handasa.co.il
Italy
Assembly Milan SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Tel. +39 02 96 980229
Sales Via Bernini,14 Fax +39 02 96 980 999
Service 20020 Solaro (Milano) http://www.sew-eurodrive.it
milano@sew-eurodrive.it
Ivory Coast
Sales Abidjan SEW-EURODRIVE SARL Tel. +225 21 21 81 05
Ivory Coast Fax +225 21 25 30 47
Rue des Pêcheurs, Zone 3 info@sew-eurodrive.ci
26 BP 916 Abidjan 26 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ci
Japan
Assembly Iwata SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD Tel. +81 538 373811
Sales 250-1, Shimoman-no, Fax +81 538 373814
Service Iwata http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Shizuoka 438-0818 sewjapan@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
hamamatsu@sew-eurodrive.co.jp
Kazakhstan
Sales Almaty SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +7 (727) 350 5156
291-291A, Tole bi street Fax +7 (727) 350 5156
050031, Almaty http://www.sew-eurodrive.kz
sew@sew-eurodrive.kz
Tashkent SEW-EURODRIVE LLP Tel. +998 71 2359411

Representative office in Uzbekistan Fax +998 71 2359412
96A, Sharaf Rashidov street, http://www.sew-eurodrive.uz
Tashkent, 100084 sew@sew-eurodrive.uz
Ulaanbaatar IM Trading LLC Tel. +976-77109997
Olympic street 28B/3 Fax +976-77109997
Sukhbaatar district, imt@imt.mn
Ulaanbaatar 14230
Kenya
Sales Nairobi SEW-EURODRIVE Pty Ltd Tel. +254 791 398840
Transnational Plaza, 5th Floor http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Mama Ngina Street info@sew.co.tz
24745332/EN – 08/2018
P.O. Box 8998-00100

Nairobi
Latvia
Sales Riga SIA Alas-Kuul Tel. +371 6 7139253
Katlakalna 11C Fax +371 6 7139386
1073 Riga http://www.alas-kuul.lv
info@alas-kuul.com

Address list
11
Lebanon
Sales (Lebanon) Beirut Gabriel Acar & Fils sarl Tel. +961 1 510 532
B. P. 80484 Fax +961 1 494 971
Bourj Hammoud, Beirut ssacar@inco.com.lb
Sales (Jordan, Kuwait , Beirut Middle East Drives S.A.L. (offshore) Tel. +961 1 494 786
Saudi Arabia, Syria) Sin El Fil. Fax +961 1 494 971
B. P. 55-378 http://www.medrives.com
Beirut info@medrives.com
Lithuania
Sales Alytus UAB Irseva Tel. +370 315 79204
Statybininku 106C Fax +370 315 56175
63431 Alytus http://www.irseva.lt
irmantas@irseva.lt
Luxembourg
representation: Belgium
Macedonia
Sales Skopje Boznos DOOEL Tel. +389 23256553
Dime Anicin 2A/7A Fax +389 23256554
1000 Skopje http://www.boznos.mk
Malaysia
Assembly Johor SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD Tel. +60 7 3549409
Sales No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya Fax +60 7 3541404
Service 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor sales@sew-eurodrive.com.my
West Malaysia
Mexiko
Assembly Quéretaro SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V. Tel. +52 442 1030-300
Sales SEM-981118-M93 Fax +52 442 1030-301
Service Tequisquiapan No. 102 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Parque Industrial Quéretaro scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 76220
Querétaro, México
Sales Puebla SEW-EURODRIVE MEXICO S.A. de C.V. Tel. +52 (222) 221 248
Service Calzada Zavaleta No. 3922 Piso 2 Local 6 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.mx
Col. Santa Cruz Buenavista scmexico@seweurodrive.com.mx
C.P. 72154
Puebla, México
Mongolia
Technical Office Ulaanbaatar IM Trading LLC Tel. +976-77109997
Olympic street 28B/3 Tel. +976-99070395
Sukhbaatar district, Fax +976-77109997
Ulaanbaatar 14230 http://imt.mn/
imt@imt.mn
Morocco
Sales Bouskoura SEW-EURODRIVE Morocco Tel. +212 522 88 85 00
Service Parc Industriel CFCIM, Lot 55 and 59 Fax +212 522 88 84 50
Bouskoura http://www.sew-eurodrive.ma
sew@sew-eurodrive.ma
Namibia
Sales Swakopmund DB Mining & Industrial Services Tel. +264 64 462 738
Einstein Street Fax +264 64 462 734
Strauss Industrial Park anton@dbminingnam.com
Unit1
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Swakopmund
Netherlands
Assembly Rotterdam SEW-EURODRIVE B.V. Tel. +31 10 4463-700
Sales Industrieweg 175 Fax +31 10 4155-552
Service 3044 AS Rotterdam Service: 0800-SEWHELP
Postbus 10085 http://www.sew-eurodrive.nl
3004 AB Rotterdam info@sew-eurodrive.nl

Address list
11
New Zealand
Assembly Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 9 2745627
Sales P.O. Box 58-428 Fax +64 9 2740165
Service 82 Greenmount drive http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.nz
East Tamaki Auckland sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. Tel. +64 3 384-6251
30 Lodestar Avenue, Wigram Fax +64 3 384-6455
Christchurch sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Nigeria
Sales Lagos Greenpeg Nig. Ltd Tel. +234-701-821-9200-1
Plot 296A, Adeyemo Akapo Str. Omole GRA http://www.greenpegltd.com
Ikeja Lagos-Nigeria bolaji.adekunle@greenpegltd.com
Norway
Assembly Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Tel. +47 69 24 10 20
Sales Solgaard skog 71 Fax +47 69 24 10 40
Service 1599 Moss http://www.sew-eurodrive.no
sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Pakistan
Sales Karachi Industrial Power Drives Tel. +92 21 452 9369
Al-Fatah Chamber A/3, 1st Floor Central Com- Fax +92-21-454 7365
mercial Area, seweurodrive@cyber.net.pk
Sultan Ahmed Shah Road, Block 7/8,
Karachi
Paraguay
Sales Fernando de la SEW-EURODRIVE PARAGUAY S.R.L Tel. +595 991 519695
Mora De la Victoria 112, Esquina nueva Asunción Fax +595 21 3285539
Departamento Central sewpy@sew-eurodrive.com.py
Fernando de la Mora, Barrio Bernardino
Peru
Assembly Lima SEW EURODRIVE DEL PERU S.A.C. Tel. +51 1 3495280
Sales Los Calderos, 120-124 Fax +51 1 3493002
Service Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.pe
sewperu@sew-eurodrive.com.pe
Philippines
Sales Makati P.T. Cerna Corporation Tel. +63 2 519 6214
4137 Ponte St., Brgy. Sta. Cruz Fax +63 2 890 2802
Makati City 1205 mech_drive_sys@ptcerna.com
http://www.ptcerna.com
Poland
Assembly Łódź SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. Tel. +48 42 293 00 00
Sales ul. Techniczna 5 Fax +48 42 293 00 49
Service 92-518 Łódź http://www.sew-eurodrive.pl
sew@sew-eurodrive.pl
Service Tel. +48 42 293 0030 24 Hour Service
Fax +48 42 293 0043 Tel. +48 602 739 739 (+48 602 SEW SEW)
serwis@sew-eurodrive.pl
Portugal
Assembly Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Tel. +351 231 20 9670
Sales Av. da Fonte Nova, n.º 86 Fax +351 231 20 3685
Service 3050-379 Mealhada http://www.sew-eurodrive.pt
infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Romania
Sales Bucharest Sialco Trading SRL Tel. +40 21 230-1328
Service str. Brazilia nr. 36 Fax +40 21 230-7170
011783 Bucuresti sialco@sialco.ro
Russia
Assembly St. Petersburg ЗАО «СЕВ-ЕВРОДРАЙФ» Tel. +7 812 3332522 / +7 812 5357142
Sales а. я. 36 Fax +7 812 3332523
Service 195220 Санкт-Петербург http://www.sew-eurodrive.ru
sew@sew-eurodrive.ru

Address list
11
Sambia
representation: South Africa
Senegal
Sales Dakar SENEMECA Tel. +221 338 494 770
Mécanique Générale Fax +221 338 494 771
Km 8, Route de Rufisque http://www.senemeca.com
B.P. 3251, Dakar senemeca@senemeca.sn
Serbia
Sales Belgrade DIPAR d.o.o. Tel. +381 11 347 3244 / +381 11 288 0393
Ustanicka 128a Fax +381 11 347 1337
PC Košum, IV floor office@dipar.rs
11000 Beograd
Singapore
Assembly Singapore SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. Tel. +65 68621701
Sales No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Fax +65 68612827
Service Jurong Industrial Estate http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.sg
Singapore 638644 sewsingapore@sew-eurodrive.com
Slovakia
Sales Bratislava SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel.+421 2 33595 202, 217, 201
Rybničná 40 Fax +421 2 33595 200
831 06 Bratislava http://www.sew-eurodrive.sk
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Košice SEW-Eurodrive SK s.r.o. Tel. +421 55 671 2245
Slovenská ulica 26 Fax +421 55 671 2254
040 01 Košice Mobile +421 907 671 976
sew@sew-eurodrive.sk
Slovenia
Sales Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. Tel. +386 3 490 83-20
Service UI. XIV. divizije 14 Fax +386 3 490 83-21
3000 Celje pakman@siol.net
South Africa
Assembly Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 11 248-7000
Sales Eurodrive House Fax +27 11 248-7289
Service Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads http://www.sew.co.za
Aeroton Ext. 2 info@sew.co.za
Johannesburg 2013
P.O.Box 90004
Bertsham 2013
Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 21 552-9820
Rainbow Park Fax +27 21 552-9830
Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Telex 576 062
Montague Gardens bgriffiths@sew.co.za
Cape Town
P.O.Box 36556
Chempet 7442
Durban SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 31 902 3815
48 Prospecton Road Fax +27 31 902 3826
Isipingo cdejager@sew.co.za
Durban
P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605
Nelspruit SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Tel. +27 13 752-8007
7 Christie Crescent Fax +27 13 752-8008
Vintonia robermeyer@sew.co.za
P.O.Box 1942
24745332/EN – 08/2018
Nelspruit 1200
South Korea
Assembly Ansan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 31 492-8051
Sales 7, Dangjaengi-ro, Fax +82 31 492-8056
Service Danwon-gu, http://www.sew-eurodrive.kr
Ansan-si, Gyeonggi-do, Zip 425-839 master.korea@sew-eurodrive.com

Address list
11
South Korea
Busan SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. Tel. +82 51 832-0204
28, Noksansandan 262-ro 50beon-gil, Fax +82 51 832-0230
Gangseo-gu,
Busan, Zip 618-820
Spain
Assembly Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAÑA, S.L. Tel. +34 94 43184-70
Sales Parque Tecnológico, Edificio, 302 http://www.sew-eurodrive.es
Service 48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Sri Lanka
Sales Colombo SM International (Pte) Ltd Tel. +94 1 2584887
254, Galle Raod Fax +94 1 2582981
Colombo 4, Sri Lanka
Swaziland
Sales Manzini C G Trading Co. (Pty) Ltd Tel. +268 2 518 6343
PO Box 2960 Fax +268 2 518 5033
Manzini M200 engineering@cgtrading.co.sz
Sweden
Assembly Jönköping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Tel. +46 36 34 42 00
Sales Gnejsvägen 6-8 Fax +46 36 34 42 80
Service 553 03 Jönköping http://www.sew-eurodrive.se
Box 3100 S-550 03 Jönköping jonkoping@sew.se
Switzerland
Assembly Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Tel. +41 61 417 1717
Sales Jurastrasse 10 Fax +41 61 417 1700
Service 4142 Münchenstein bei Basel http://www.imhof-sew.ch
info@imhof-sew.ch
Taiwan
Sales Taipei Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 2 27383535
6F-3, No. 267, Sec. 2 Fax +886 2 27368268
Tung Huw S. Road Telex 27 245
Taipei sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Nan Tou Ting Shou Trading Co., Ltd. Tel. +886 49 255353
No. 55 Kung Yeh N. Road Fax +886 49 257878
Industrial District sewtwn@ms63.hinet.net
Nan Tou 540 http://www.tingshou.com.tw
Tanzania
Sales Daressalam SEW-EURODRIVE PTY LIMITED TANZANIA Tel. +255 0 22 277 5780
Plot 52, Regent Estate Fax +255 0 22 277 5788
PO Box 106274 http://www.sew-eurodrive.co.tz
Dar Es Salaam info@sew.co.tz
Thailand
Assembly Chonburi SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Tel. +66 38 454281
Sales 700/456, Moo.7, Donhuaroh Fax +66 38 454288
Service Muang sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.com
Chonburi 20000
Tunisia
Sales Tunis T. M.S. Technic Marketing Service Tel. +216 79 40 88 77
Zone Industrielle Mghira 2 Fax +216 79 40 88 66
Lot No. 39 http://www.tms.com.tn
24745332/EN – 08/2018
2082 Fouchana tms@tms.com.tn
Turkey
Assembly Kocaeli-Gebze SEW-EURODRİVE Hareket Tel. +90 262 9991000 04
Sales Sistemleri San. Ve TIC. Ltd. Sti Fax +90 262 9991009
Service Gebze Organize Sanayi Böl. 400 Sok No. 401 http://www.sew-eurodrive.com.tr
41480 Gebze Kocaeli sew@sew-eurodrive.com.tr

Address list
11
United Arab Emirates
Sales Dubai SEW-EURODRIVE FZE Tel. +971 (0)4 8806461
Service PO Box 263835 Fax +971 (0)4 8806464
Office No. S3A1SR03 http://www.sew-eurodrive.ae
Jebel Ali Free Zone – South, info@sew-eurodrive.ae
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Ukraine
Assembly Dnipropetrovsk ООО «СЕВ-Евродрайв» Tel. +380 56 370 3211
Sales ул. Рабочая, 23-B, офис 409 Fax +380 56 372 2078
Service 49008 Днепр http://www.sew-eurodrive.ua
sew@sew-eurodrive.ua
Uruguay
Assembly Montevideo SEW-EURODRIVE Uruguay, S. A. Tel. +598 2 21181-89
Sales Jose Serrato 3569 Esqina Corumbe Fax +598 2 21181-90
CP 12000 Montevideo sewuy@sew-eurodrive.com.uy
USA
Production Southeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
Assembly Region 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway Fax Sales +1 864 439-7830
Sales P.O. Box 518 Fax Production +1 864 439-9948
Service Lyman, S.C. 29365 Fax Assembly +1 864 439-0566
Fax Confidential/HR +1 864 949-5557
http://www.seweurodrive.com
cslyman@seweurodrive.com
Assembly Northeast SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 856 467-2277
Sales Region Pureland Ind. Complex Fax +1 856 845-3179
Service 2107 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 csbridgeport@seweurodrive.com
Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014
Midwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 937 335-0036
Region 2001 West Main Street Fax +1 937 332-0038
Troy, Ohio 45373 cstroy@seweurodrive.com
Southwest SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 214 330-4824
Region 3950 Platinum Way Fax +1 214 330-4724
Dallas, Texas 75237 csdallas@seweurodrive.com
Western SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 510 487-3560
Region 30599 San Antonio St. Fax +1 510 487-6433
Hayward, CA 94544 cshayward@seweurodrive.com
Wellford SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Tel. +1 864 439-7537
148/150 Finch Rd. Fax +1 864 661 1167
Wellford, S.C. 29385 IGOrders@seweurodrive.com
Additional addresses for service provided on request!
Vietnam
Sales Ho Chi Minh Nam Trung Co., Ltd Tel. +84 8 8301026
City Huế - South Vietnam / Construction Materials Fax +84 8 8392223
250 Binh Duong Avenue, Thu Dau Mot Town, khanh-nguyen@namtrung.com.vn
Binh Duong Province http://www.namtrung.com.vn
HCM office: 91 Tran Minh Quyen Street
District 10, Ho Chi Minh City
Hanoi MICO LTD Tel. +84 4 39386666
Quảng Trị - North Vietnam / All sectors except Fax +84 4 3938 6888
Construction Materials nam_ph@micogroup.com.vn
8th Floor, Ocean Park Building, 01 Dao Duy http://www.micogroup.com.vn
Anh St, Ha Noi, Viet Nam
24745332/EN – 08/2018

Index
Index
Icons Control cabinet ............................................. 196
Motor wiring compartment............................ 194
/DUB (Diagnostic Unit Brake) ............................ 164
Brake malfunctions ............................................ 217
/V forced cooling fan.......................................... 101
Brake rectifier combinations .............................. 192
Numerical Brake replacement
2. Shaft end ......................................................... 55 DR.71 – 80, DRN80, DR2..80 ...................... 157
Brakemotor structure
A DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 ................. 139
AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors 84 DR..71 – 80, DRN63 – 80, DR2..63 – 80 ..... 137
Add-on encoder ................................................. 104 DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S ...................... 138
AG7. .................................................................. 104 Braking torques ................................................. 183
AH7. .................................................................. 104 Braking work...................................................... 183
Air filter /LF .......................................................... 53 Built-in encoder ................................................. 225
Anti-condensation heating Built-in encoders................................................ 105
/Hx ................................................................ 108 C
AS7.................................................................... 104
Auxiliary terminals, arrangement ....................... 235 Cable gland
NPT ................................................................ 42
B Changing the blocking direction ........................ 177
Backstop............................................................ 177 Changing the brake disk carrier
BE05 – 2............................................................ 145 BE05 – 122................................................... 152
Bearing lubrication............................................. 115 Changing the brake spring
Brake BE05 – 122................................................... 154
BE05 – 2....................................................... 145 Changing the braking torque
BE05 – 20..................................................... 146 BE05 – 122................................................... 153
BE120........................................................... 147 Changing the magnet body
BE122........................................................... 148 BE05 – 122................................................... 155
BE30............................................................. 147 Condensation drain holes.................................... 33
BE32............................................................. 148 Connecting diagnostic unit /DUB......................... 91
BE60............................................................. 147 Connecting diagnostic unit /DUE....................... 169
BE62............................................................. 148 Connecting the motor .......................................... 69
Braking torques ............................................ 183 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS plug connectors
Braking work................................................. 183 ....................................................................... 84
Operating currents BE.. brake...................... 184 IS plug connector ........................................... 79
Working air gap ............................................ 183 KC1 terminal strip........................................... 86
Brake connection................................................. 87 KCC terminal strip .......................................... 85
Brake control ............................................... 58, 192 Terminal box....................................... 70, 71, 72
BG.. .............................................................. 227 via plug connector .......................................... 79
via terminal board........................................... 70
24745332/EN – 08/18
BGE.............................................................. 227
BMP3.1......................................................... 231 via terminal strip ............................................. 85
BSG.............................................................. 227 Connection
BSR .............................................................. 229 Variants .......................................................... 26
BUR.............................................................. 227 Copyright notice .................................................... 8
Connection ..................................................... 87 Customer service .............................................. 219

Index
D Equipment, accessory ......................................... 96

ES7.................................................................... 104
Delta connection
R13............................................................... 220 F
R72............................................................... 221 For mounting to gear units .................................. 48
Design Forced cooling fan
DR..315, DRN315 .......................................... 20 Wiring diagram ............................................. 232
Motor .............................................................. 20 Forced cooling fan /V ........................................ 101
Designated use ................................................... 10 Frequency inverter operation .............................. 59
Diagnostic unit /DUE ......................................... 168
G
Direct mounting ................................................... 48
Disassembly Grounding............................................................ 62
Diagnostic unit /DUE .................................... 167 at the terminal box.......................................... 61
Drive components, installation ............................ 35 NF................................................................... 61
DRK single-phase motor H
S1 operation ................................................. 213
DRK.. ................................................................... 67 Hazard symbols
DRK... single-phase motor Meaning............................................................ 7
Wiring diagram ............................................. 234 Hollow shaft rotary encoder................................. 39
Drying HR/HF manual brake release, retrofitting .......... 161
Motor .............................................................. 31 Hx ...................................................................... 108
DUB (Diagnostic Unit Brake) ............................... 91 I
E Improving the grounding...................................... 62
EG7. .................................................................. 104 Inspecting the brakemotor
EH7. .................................................................. 104 DR.63 – 315, DRN80 – 315 ......................... 140
EI7 ..................................................................... 225 Inspecting the motor
Electrical connection ........................................... 13 DR..71 – 315, DRN80 – 315 ........................ 135
Electrical installation ............................................ 57 Inspection .......................................................... 112
Minimum requirements for encoder cables .. 108 /DUB............................................................. 164
Embedded safety notes......................................... 7 Inspection intervals............................................ 114
EMC..................................................................... 62 Installation ........................................................... 33
Encoder ....................................................... 26, 104 Electrical......................................................... 57
AG7. ............................................................. 104 In damp locations or outdoors ........................ 34
AH7. ............................................................. 104 Measuring nipple ............................................ 54
AS7............................................................... 104 Mechanical ..................................................... 29
EG7. ............................................................. 104 Tolerances...................................................... 35
EH7. ............................................................. 104 XH.A encoder mounting adapter .................... 39
EI7. ............................................................... 105 Installation notes
EI8. ............................................................... 105 Encoder ........................................................ 107
Installation tolerances.......................................... 35
24745332/EN – 08/18
ES7............................................................... 104
Technical data .............................................. 202 Installation, conditions ......................................... 29
Encoder cable ................................................... 108 Insulation resistance............................................ 31
Encoder cable requirements ............................. 108 Insulation, reinforced ........................................... 59
Encoder connection........................................... 107 Intervals for inspection and maintenance .......... 114
Encoder mounting adapter .................................. 38 IS plug connector ................................................ 79

Index
Isolation transformer............................................ 31 DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80. 16
K Mounting adapter .......................................... 36, 38
Encoder .......................................................... 36
KC1 terminal strip ................................................ 86 Measuring nipple ............................................ 54
KCC terminal strip ............................................... 85 XH.A ............................................................. 133
KTY84-130 .......................................................... 98 XV......................................................... 129, 131
KTY84-130 temperature sensor .......................... 98 XV.A ............................................................. 128
L Mounting XH.A .................................................... 39
LF N
Air filters ......................................................... 53 Nameplate ........................................................... 21
Low-speed motors ............................................... 66 Notes
Lubricant table ................................................... 200 Designation in the documentation .................... 6
Lubrication ......................................................... 115 Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 7
M O
Maintenance ...................................................... 112 Operation
Maintenance intervals ....................................... 114 Safety notes ................................................... 14
Malfunctions ...................................................... 214 Operation with frequency inverter ....................... 59
Malfunctions when operating with a frequency in- Optical status messages ................................... 105
verter ............................................................ 218
Options ................................................................ 25
Measuring nipple mounting adapter .................... 54
Electrical......................................................... 96
Mechanical installation ........................................ 29
Mechanical ..................................................... 51
Minimum requirements for encoder cables ....... 108
Other applicable documentation............................ 8
Motor
Connect via terminal board ............................ 70 P
Connecting the terminal strip.......................... 85 Plug connector .................................................... 79
Connecting via plug connector ....................... 79 AB.., AD.., AM.., AK.., AC.., AS...................... 84
Connection ..................................................... 69 IS .................................................................... 79
Drying ............................................................. 31 ISU ................................................................. 79
Setup .............................................................. 33 Port
Motor design Encoder ........................................................ 107
DR..315, DRN315 .......................................... 20 Preliminary work for motor and brake maintenance
Motor designation ................................................ 24 ..................................................................... 117
Motor feet Product names ...................................................... 8
Retrofitting/modifying motor feet .................... 43 PT100 .................................................................. 99
Motor malfunctions ............................................ 215 PT100 temperature detection .............................. 99
Motor mounting ................................................... 48 PT1000 .............................................................. 100
Motor protection ........................................ 223, 224 PT1000 temperature detection .......................... 100
TF ......................................................... 223, 224 Pulse voltages ..................................................... 59
TH......................................................... 223, 224
24745332/EN – 08/18
R
Motor protection device ....................................... 58
Motor structure .................................................... 15 Reinforced bearings .................................. 110, 116
DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 ................... 17 Relubrication ..................................................... 115
DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 ...................... 18 Relubrication device .......................................... 115
DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 ...................... 19 Relubrication intervals ....................................... 116
Removing rotary encoder .......... 120, 122, 124, 126

Index
EG7. and AG7. ..................................... 122, 124 Special features

EH7. and AH7. ............................................. 126 Low-speed motors.......................................... 66
ES7. and AS7............................................... 120 Switching operation ........................................ 66
Removing the absolute encoder........ 128, 129, 131 Torque motors ................................................ 66
Removing the encoder Star connection
............. 120, 122, 124, 126, 128, 129, 131, 133 R13............................................................... 220
EG7. and AG7. ..................................... 122, 124 R76............................................................... 222
EH7. and AH7. ............................................. 126 Startup ............................................................... 109
ES7. and AS7............................................... 120 Safety notes ................................................... 14
EV.., AV.., and XV.. ...................... 128, 129, 131 Status message evaluation unit ........................ 176
EV.., AV.., and XV.A..................................... 128 Storage
Removing the hollow shaft encoder .................. 133 Reinforced ............................................ 110, 116
Removing the incremental encoder... 128, 129, 131 Storage, extended ............................................... 31
EV.., AV.., and XV.. .............................. 129, 131 Strip heater ........................................................ 108
EV.., AV.., and XV.A..................................... 128 Structure
Removing the special encoder .......... 128, 129, 131 Brakemotor................................... 137, 138, 139
Resistance......................................................... 188 DR..160 – 315, DRN132M – 315 with BE .... 139
Resistance measurement of the brake...... 188, 191 DR..160 – 180, DRN132M – 180 ................... 17
Retrofitting HR/HF manual brake release ........... 51 DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 ...................... 18
Retrofitting the HR/HF manual brake release ... 161 DR..250 – 280, DRN250 – 280 ...................... 19
Rights to claim under limited warranty .................. 8 DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80. 16
Rolling bearing .................................................. 198 DR..71 – 80, DRN63 – 80, DR2..63 – 80 with BE
RS ..................................................................... 177 ..................................................................... 137
S DR..90 – 132, DRN90 – 132S with BE......... 138
DUB.............................................................. 163
Safety cover ........................................................ 55 Motor ............................................ 16, 17, 18, 19
Safety notes Switch contacts ................................................. 109
Designated use .............................................. 10 Switching operation ............................................. 66
Designation in the documentation .................... 6
T
Electrical connection ...................................... 13
Meaning of the hazard symbols ....................... 7 Target group ........................................................ 10
Preliminary information..................................... 9 Technical data ................................................... 180
Setup .............................................................. 12 ASI Absolute encoders......................... 205, 210
Storage........................................................... 11 Incremental encoders with solid shaft .......... 208
Structure of embedded..................................... 7 Incremental rotary encoders with plug-in shaft
Structure of the section-related ........................ 6 ............................................................. 203, 209
Second shaft end ................................................ 55 Incremental rotary encoders with spread shaft
............................................................. 203, 209
Section-related safety notes .................................. 6
SSI absolute encoder ................................... 204
Serial number ...................................................... 23
Technical data BE.. brake
Setting the working air gap
24745332/EN – 08/18
Operating currents BE.. brake...................... 184

BE05 – 122................................................... 150
Terminal arrangement ....................................... 235
Setup ............................................................. 12, 33
Terminal board .................................................... 70
Signal words in safety notes.................................. 6
Terminal box
Single-phase motor ............................................. 67
Rotate............................................................. 40
Special design ..................................................... 29
Terminal box positions ...................................... 235

Index
Terminal strip....................................................... 85 Types

KC1 ................................................................ 86 Overview ........................................................ 25
KCC................................................................ 85 U
TF ........................................................ 96, 223, 224
TF temperature sensor ........................................ 96 UWU51A switched-mode power supply ............ 103
TH........................................................ 97, 223, 224 W
TH winding thermostats....................................... 97
Waste disposal .................................................. 219
Torque motors ..................................................... 66
Wear .................................................................. 114
Trademarks ........................................................... 8
Wiring diagram
Transport ............................................................. 11
BMP3.1......................................................... 231
Type designation ................................................. 24
R13 delta connection............................ 220, 221
Bearing ........................................................... 27
R13 star connection ..................................... 220
Connection variants........................................ 26
R76 star connection ..................................... 222
Encoder .......................................................... 26
Wiring diagrams ................................................ 220
Mechanical attachments................................. 25
BG.. .............................................................. 227
Other additional features ................................ 27
BGE.............................................................. 227
Output types;Output types.............................. 25
BS24............................................................. 227
Temperature detection ................................... 25
BSG.............................................................. 227
Temperature sensor and temperature detection
....................................................................... 25 BSR .............................................................. 229
Ventilation....................................................... 27 TF ......................................................... 223, 224
Type designation DR.. TH......................................................... 223, 224
Condition monitoring ...................................... 27 Working air gap ................................................. 183
24745332/EN – 08/18

SEW-EURODRIVE—Driving the world
SEW-EURODRIVE GmbH & Co KG

Ernst-Blickle-Str. 42
76646 BRUCHSAL
GERMANY
Tel. +49 7251 75-0
Fax +49 7251 75-1970
sew@sew-eurodrive.com
www.sew-eurodrive.com

Operating Instructions: AC Motors DR..71 - 315, DRN63 - 315, DR2..63 - 80

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions: AC Motors DR..71 - 315, DRN63 - 315, DR2..63 - 80

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating Instructions: AC Motors DR..71 - 315, DRN63 - 315, DR2..63 - 80

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services *24745332_0818*

Edition 08/2018 24745332/EN

2 Safety notes .............................................................................................................................. 9

3 Motor structure ....................................................................................................................... 15

4 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................................... 29

5 Electrical installation.............................................................................................................. 57

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 3

5.5 Improving the grounding (EMC), HF grounding ............................................................ 62

6 Startup ................................................................................................................................... 109

8 Technical data....................................................................................................................... 180

4 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

10 Appendix ............................................................................................................................... 220

11 Address list ........................................................................................................................... 236

Index ...................................................................................................................................... 247

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 5

1.2 Structure of the safety notes

Signal word Meaning Consequences if disregarded

1.2.2 Structure of section-related safety notes

6 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Hazard symbol Meaning

Warning of dangerous electrical voltage

Warning of hot surfaces

Warning of risk of crushing

Warning of suspended load

Warning of automatic restart

1.2.3 Structure of embedded safety notes

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 7

1.3 Rights to claim under limited warranty

1.4 Product names and trademarks

1.5 Copyright notice

1.6 Other applicable documentation

1.6.1 DR..71 – 315, DRN63 – 315, DR2..63 – 80 AC motors

8 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

2.2 Duties of the user

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 9

2.3 Target group

2.4 Designated use

10 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 11

2.6.1 Restrictions of use

12 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Nominal voltage VN Distance

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 13

14 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

3.1 Basic design of DRN63, DR2..63 motors

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 15

3.2 Basic design of DR..71 – 132, DRN71 – 132S, DR2..71 – 80 motors

16 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 17

3.4 Basic structure DR..200 – 225, DRN200 – 225 motors

18 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

Operating Instructions – AC Motors 19

3.6 Basic structure DR..315, DRN315 motors

20 Operating Instructions – AC Motors

3.7.1 DRN.. motor nameplate

[2] DRN90L4/FF [2]

[8] FF FF165 D200 WE 24X50 [8]

Drive Technology \ Drive Automation \ System Integration \ Services 24745332_0818